You are on page 1of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

Table of Contents

Contents
Tab

1.

2.

3.
Tab

Tab
Tab
Tab
Tab
Tab

4.
Tab

1640-IN-006-0-02

Introduction ............................................................................................... 3
1.1
About Version 3.X ......................................................................... 4
1.2
Menu Selection Changes for Version 3.1 ...................................... 5
1.3
General Protection Faults (GPFs) ................................................. 6
1.4
LCD Systems vs EL Systems ....................................................... 7
Installation ............................................................................................... 7
2.1
A Note on Modfiles ........................................................................ 8
2.2
Modifying the PATH Variable ........................................................ 8
2.3
Printing the TEXT Files ................................................................. 8
2.4
Selecting an Application ................................................................ 9
2.5
Printing the Screens and Message Files ....................................... 9
2.6
The User and System Editor ......................................................... 9
2.7
After Editing Screens .................................................................. 10
2.8
Analog I/O Modfiles (Extrusion Applications only) ...................... 10
2.9
Application Specific Modfiles ....................................................... 10
2.10 Multi-Chassis Addressing ............................................................ 10
2.11 Miscellaneous Multi-Rack Information ........................................ 12
2.12 Determining the Number of Racks .............................................. 12
2.13 Multi-Rack and Cartridges ........................................................... 12
2.14 Mulit-Rack Operation and System Commands ........................... 13
2.15 Operating with "Partial" Systems ................................................ 13
Main Menu ............................................................................................. 15
3.1
Application ................................................................................... 19
3.1.1
Editor Type .......................................................................... 19
3.1.2
Select ................................................................................... 20
3.1.3
Utilities ................................................................................. 24
3.1.4
Linker ................................................................................... 37
3.1.5
Report Generator ................................................................. 43
3.1.6
Exit to DOS .......................................................................... 44
3.2
Toolbox ....................................................................................... 45
3.2.1
Character Set ....................................................................... 45
3.3
Help ............................................................................................. 49
3.3.1
About ................................................................................... 49
3.3.2
Help ..................................................................................... 49
3.4
Editors ......................................................................................... 51
3.4.1
Screen ................................................................................. 51
3.4.2
Templates ............................................................................ 54
3.4.3
Messages ............................................................................ 55
3.4.4
Math Editor .......................................................................... 61
3.4.5
Security ................................................................................ 71
3.4.6
Machine Function Keys ....................................................... 75
3.4.7
Save ..................................................................................... 79
3.4.8
Save As ............................................................................... 79
3.4.9
Quit without Saving .............................................................. 81
3.4.10 Exit with Saving ................................................................... 81
Screen (or Sprite) Editor Menu ............................................................... 83
4.1
Graphic Icons .............................................................................. 87
4.1.1
Graphic Text (F1) ................................................................. 87
Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 1 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Contents (continued)

Tab

Tab

Tab

Tab

Tab

Tab

1640-IN-006-0-02

4.1.2
Static Keywords (F2) ........................................................... 89
4.1.3
The Select Arrow (F3) .......................................................... 90
4.1.4
Draw Pixel (F4) .................................................................... 92
4.1.5
Draw Rectangle (F5) ............................................................ 92
4.1.6
Draw Circle (F6) ................................................................... 93
4.1.7
Draw Polyline (F7) ............................................................... 95
4.1.8
Paint (or Fill)(F8) .................................................................. 96
4.2
Control Functions (n/a for Sprites) .............................................. 97
4.2.1
Setpoint ................................................................................ 97
4.2.2
Value .................................................................................. 102
4.2.3
Control Relays ................................................................... 105
4.2.4
Messages .......................................................................... 109
4.2.5
System Commands ........................................................... 114
4.2.6
Increment/Decrement Setpoint .......................................... 117
4.2.7
Security Setpoint ................................................................ 121
4.2.8
Paths .................................................................................. 122
4.3
Graphs (n/a for Sprites) ............................................................. 123
4.3.1
Line Graphs ....................................................................... 123
4.3.2
Bar Graphs ........................................................................ 129
4.3.3
SPC Graphs ....................................................................... 134
4.3.4
Profile Graphs .................................................................... 138
4.4
Softkey (n/a for Sprites) ............................................................ 145
4.4.1
Edit ..................................................................................... 145
4.4.2
Display ............................................................................... 149
4.5
Toolbox (expanded) .................................................................. 151
4.5.1
Redraw .............................................................................. 151
4.5.2
Character Set ..................................................................... 152
4.5.3
Clear Screen ...................................................................... 154
4.5.4
Sound ................................................................................ 155
4.5.5
Delete, Move, or Modify an Element .................................. 155
4.5.6
Snap .................................................................................. 157
4.6
Help ........................................................................................... 158
4.6.1
About ................................................................................. 158
4.6.2
Help ................................................................................... 158
5. Character Sets ...................................................................................... 159
5.1
ASCII Character Set (for EL Display) ........................................ 159
5.2
Partial ASCII Character Set (for LCD Display) .......................... 160
Appendix A
........................................................................................... 183
Appendix B
........................................................................................... 185
Appendix C
........................................................................................... 187
Appendix D
........................................................................................... 189
Appendix E
........................................................................................... 191
Appendix F
........................................................................................... 195
Appendix G
........................................................................................... 197
Appendix H
........................................................................................... 245
Appendix I
........................................................................................... 247
Appendix J
........................................................................................... 249

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 2 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


1. Introduction
The OptiGrafix Screen Editor software package provides the ability to custom
design screens for the MACO 4000/5000/6000 Series Electroluminescent (EL)
and Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Operator Stations.
EL screens can be developed using multiple text sizes as well as multiple
languages and graphic images. Graph functions allow setpoints and values to be
displayed in bar and line graph formats. LCD screens use a single text size (8x8
for ASCII text; 16x16 for graphic text). LCD screens have the multiple language
capability, but lack both the graphing and graphic capabilities.
Software Registration Form
Please fill out the software registration form included at the front of this manual and
return it immediately to Barber-Colman Company. Registered OptiGrafix users are
entitled to free technical telephone support and one year of free software
upgrades. Registered users will also be notified of future software revisions.
The Disks
Each OptiGrafix Editor package consists of four 3-1/2" disks:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Installation Disk
Screen Sets Disk
Module Files Disk
Editor Disk

Note that the files contained on these disks are compressed. They expand
(explode) at installation.
Installation Disk
Contains the install routine.
Screen Sets Disk
Contains the current standard system and user screens and subsidiary files for
each application type (Injection, Extrusion and Blowmolding). These screens can
be used "as is" or edited to more closely match a specific machine or application.

Description
Make:
Class:
Speed:
Memory:
Disk Cache:
Hard Drive Storage:
Floppy Drive:
Video:
DOS:
Mouse:
Serial Port:

Recommended Minimum
Any
80486/sx IBM AT compatible
33 MHZ
4 Megabytes (640K Conventional, 512K Extended)
512K
6 Megabytes available
1.44M 3-1/2"
640x480 VGA 16 Color
MS-DOS 5.0 or higher
Microsoft Compatible 7.1 or higher
1 (2 if Serial Mouse is used)

Note that although a printer is not necessary in order to run the program, it is recommended.
Refer to Section 3.1.5.1 for a list of printers currently supported by OptiGrafix.
*OptiGrafix has not been thoroughly tested with Windows. We suggest running OptiGrafix from DOS.
Including SMRTDRV.EXE in your autoexec.bat file may enhance the performance of the OptiGrafix program.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 3 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Module Files (Modfiles) Disk
Contains all of the latest version module files (modfiles) as well as previous modfile
versions in directories titled by the version/revisons contained in them. Unless
there is a specific reason to use earlier versions (old hardware or firmware), the
latest version should always be used to create screens.
Editor Disk
Contains program software and subsidiary files, as well as the help file.
Computer Requirements
The table on page 3 should be used as a guide in either upgrading an existing
computer or purchasing a new computer. It should be stressed that a user's
personal requirements must be considered in any computer upgrade or purchase.
The 80486SX processor is not state-of-the-art, but does allow the user to run
software such as Windows* 3.X in the enhanced mode.
1.1 About Version 3.X
Version 3.0 of OptiGrafix included a number of new features as well as changes
to some existing features:
An "Install" routine was added for easy installation of the entire software
package.
Selections were identified as "El 41aa" and "Lcd 41ax" instead of "MACO 4000"
and "MACO 4100." "Lcd 41ax" includes all LCD operator stations.
Utilities were changed to include a selection for copying or moving entire
applications.
Screen transfers from the computer to the MACO changed to be performed
using the "TXM4000" program which is included (as "Transfer") under Utilities.
Linker changed to include a selection for linking selected screens from within an
application.
Printer Setup (under Report Generator) expanded to list more printers, incuding
HP LaserJet IIP.
A "Math Editor" was added to the Editors menu. This function allows for the
formulation of control algorithms specific to the needs of the user to be
created and transferred to the controller (note that the math option must be
purchased with the controller.
The Screen Editor expanded to include a menu selection for copying individual
screens from other applications.
Control Functions expanded to include a selection for programming screen
paths directly to a screen.
Graphs expanded to include a "Profile" selection for creating Parison profiles (for
blowmolding).
Bar Graphs enhanced to use Sprites to animatescreen graphics (EL display
only).
The "Help" file was expanded to include on-line help.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 4 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


OptiGrafix Version 3.1 introduced a number of features which were added either
to save time when editing or to add flexibility to an editing session.
Many of these changes were provided in order to make it easier to perform "mass
changes" to screen sets and control elements.
"Linking" has been modified to allow "custom linking" so that a screen library can
be used to create several different screen sets.
A "Template" editor has been added. If templates are used, the linker substitutes
the setpoint and value data from the template onto any screens in the application
which have those particular setpoints or values. This allows a single screen set to
be used to support several similar molding applications.
"Global Changes" have been added to the Card Number and Controller Number
fields. This speeds screen programming for large single rack or multirack systems.
The "Report Generator" now appears as a dialog box with multiple printing choices
available all at one time. Message files can now also be printed (much faster) as
ASCII text.
In previous versions of OptiGrafix, double-clicking the mouse was required to
activate fields in dialogs boxes and to select items from list boxes. For V3.1, a
single mouse click is all that is required to activate a field in a dialog box. For list
boxes, if the mouse pointer is over a selected item a double-click is required.
However, if the mouse pointer is outside of the list box area, a single click will
accept the selected list box item. Directory dialogs boxes with their associated list
boxes have not been changed and behave in the same manner as in previous
versions.
Other changes are described in the "Menu Selection Changes for Version 3.1"
section below.
1.2 Menu Selection Changes for Version 3.1
The following menu selections have been added or deleted for V3.1:
Application - Utilities...
- added Purge application
This feature was automatically invoked when a screen configuration file became
a certain size. The user now has control over Purging (removing previously used
setpoints and values from the screen configuration file).
Application - Linker...
- renamed Link all... to Link Current
- renamed Partial Link to Custom link
Now, only the current application can be linked. It didnt make sense to link an
application unless the user was currently working on it. Custom link allows the user
to build a screen set from the Build Screen Dialog box. The linker automatically
reindexes the object screens so that paths point to the proper screens. Unused
SOFTKEYs and unused ON SCREEN PATHS are deleted from linked object files.
Application - Report generator...
- deleted entire sub menu
The sub menu has been replaced by a dialog box.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 5 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Editors
- added Template
This new feature allows users to replace screen setpoint/value data during a link.
Editors - Screen...
- deleted Select
Select was replaced with Existing and New to save keyboard and mouse clicks.
Editors - Screen...
- Changed Activate to reActivate
No difference in the function - this name is a more appropriate description.
Editors - Screen...
- added deLete
This new feature allows the deletion of a screen from the application. It automatically adjusts pointers for all ON SCREEN PATHS and SOFTKEYs.
Graph changed Bar graph to sprite Bar graph
added sOlid bar graph
The solid bargraph was omitted in V3.0 with the introduction of the sprite bargraph.
Older controllers can only support solid bargraphs. This allows older screen sets
with solid bargraphs to be edited as solid bargraphs.
Softkey - Display...
- added Element info
This new feature provides a method to quickly view the contents of control
elements on a screen.
Toolbox - cLearScreen...
- added sub menu items:
Clear all, Dynamics only, Statics only, Graphic text only, screen Area only,
and softKey area only.
These sub menu choices add flexibility to a screen editing session.
LCD Display - Editors added Math editor menuing.
Current models with the LCD display are math capable.
Note that many of the new features listed above require Version 3.0 or higher
Display Processor firmware (in the operator station). For existing controllers to
take full advantage of the added functions of Version 3 of OptiGrafix, it may be
necessary to update their firmware.
1.3 General Protection Faults (GPFs)
Version 3 of the OptiGrafix editor program runs under a "protected" mode of DOS.
When an "illegal" instruction is detected, a "General Protection Fault" will occur.
The "GPF" causes the program to stop executing, but does prevent the need to
reboot the computer. Any editing performed since the last "Save" will be lost! Save
early; save often. If a GPF occurs repeatedly, determine what action was taken
immediately before the GPF occurs and contact Barber-Colman Customer Support service. If you experience problems with this application, or need assistance
with any Barber-Colman product, authorized Barber-Colman Representative
Sales and Service offices are located worldwide. For the name of the BarberColman Representative nearest you, telephone:
1-800-626-5561
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 6 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


1.4 LCD Systems vs EL Systems
LCD screens are 320 pixels by 200 pixels. OptiGrafix doubles their size in order
to use the editor's 640 by 400 display. Besides screen size and resolution, there
are some other minor differences between an LCD System and an EL System.
They are as follows:
A. On the LCD, automatic screen blanking will occur after 5 minutes of inactivity
(the EL has a setpoint).
B. The LCD has a fixed scroll rate; the EL has an adjustable scroll rate.
C. There is no Screen Print function with the LCD.
D. The Real Time Clock readout does not appear on LCD screens; it does on EL
screens (the function can be programmed to any LCD screens desired).
E. The LCD has five Path keys and a Contrast key; the EL has six Path keys.
F. Screen numbers do not appear on LCD screens.
G. Vector Screen setpoints cannot be saved in an LCD system (they must be
reentered if the system is powered down). EL Vector Screen setpoints can be
saved. The powerup defaults for Vector Screen 1-8 Setpoints (NOT changeable
with OptiGrafix) are 9-16, respectively. Dedicating Screens 9-16 as the Priority
Alarm Screens eliminates the need to re-enter the setpoints after an LCD
powerdown.
H. With the LCD, System and User Screen files must be downloaded together
(System first; followed by User). With the EL, if a valid set of System Screen files
has already been downloaded, User Screens can be edited and downloaded
(without downloading System Screens).
2. Installation
An installation routine has been programmed into the disks included with this
software package. Follow the simple steps outlined below or follow the prompts on
the computer. If the entire package is not required, select only those items that are
needed. The install routine expands the files and creates subdirectories of its own.

IMPORTANT: Before beginning the installation procedure, make a backup


copy of each of the program disks ("XCOPY") and store the originals in an
appropriate place!
For the sake of this description, the hard drive will always be simply the "C" drive
and the floppy drive will always be simply the "A" drive.
Insert Disk 1 into Drive A and type:
a:install (return)
After a few moments, the Barber-Colman logo will appear, along with an inset
window. Use the mouse to select those items that are to be installed. A checkmark
to the left of an item indicates selection. Clicking on a item a second time will deselect that item. For first time installation, click on "editor," "modfiles, and the proper
screen set for your controller and application. Note that the installation program
now includes an option for an LCD editing cursor for easier viewing on LCD
laptops. This option replaces the normal cross hair cursor. Press Ctl-Enter to
continue.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 7 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


A window prompting a path for the installation will appear. Either accept the default
path as shown or type in a new path and press return. A small window confirming
the path will appear. Clicking on "No" will abort the installation procedure. Clicking
on "Yes" will begin the actual installation.
A prompt appears to insert Disk 4. Press return. Wait...
A prompt appears to insert Disk 3. Press return. Wait...
A prompt appears to insert Disk 2. Press return. Wait...
A prompt will appear confirming that the installation is complete. Press return.
2.1 A Note on Modfiles
Installation segregates modfiles to separate directories for injection, extrusion,
blow molding applications, and document files. Application Specific modfiles
require the separate directories. The Hydraulic modfile is included for Injection
applications. Blow molding and Extrusion applications now use the renamed
Analog IO modfile. The "Analog I/O" modfile uses element names commensurate with extrusion applications. Do NOT install both an Analog I/O modfile and
Hydraulic modfile in the same directory!
Early versions of module files (if they exist) will be stored in subdirectories named
for the version and revision they contain. Unless there is a specific reason to use
old version modfiles (old hardware/firmware) always use the most recent version
(those which appear directly within the modfiles subdirectory). To avoid confusion
on new installations, the old modfiles can be deleted (refer to your DOS manual).
2.2 Modifying the PATH Variable
Once all the software is installed, it is helpful to add the subdirectory containing the
OptiGraf.EXE file to the path variable of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
First, locate the AUTOEXEC.BAT file (on the root directory of the startup drive).
From that directory, type:
EDIT AUTOEXEC.BAT (return)
Once the file appears on the screen, locate the path variable and add this to the
end:
;c:\BCED
Save the new AUTOEXEC.BAT file and exit.
2.3 Printing the TEXT Files
Although all of the necessary information for creating or editing applications is
available directly from the OptiGrafix Editor, it is helpful to have a printed list of the
modfiles available as a reference source. If the installation procedure above has
been followed and you wish to print the injection modfiles, simply type:
PRINT C:\BCED\INJMOD\*.TXT (return)
Make certain a functioning printer is hooked up, turned on and on line. Make certain
there is plenty of paper in the printer (the modfiles contain a lot of information).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 8 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


2.4

Selecting an Application
(IMPORTANT for First Time Operation)
For first time operation, it is necessary to select an application as described here
BEFORE attempting other actions (like printing, editing, etc.).
Open the OptiGrafix Editor by typing:
OPTIGRAF

(return)

A graphic of the Barber-Colman logo will appear on the screen and then be
replaced by the editor menu.
Click (and hold) on Application.
Release the mouse button while over Editor type.
Click and release on User.
Click (and hold) on Application (again).
Release the mouse button while over select.
Click and release on the proper display type.
Click on Existing.
Double click on the green highlighted area (the two periods) directly below
"Directories and Drives." Each double click will cause the directory to back out a
single level until the root directory is reached. At that point it should be possible to
follow the path to the applications.
If the installation procedure has been followed, once the computer is at the root (C)
directory, double click on "BCED." Then click on the correct display type (EL or
LCD). Then click on the application type (e.g., INJUSER). The application name
will appear directly below "Application File Names". Once the application name is
on display, highlight it by clicking directly on it and then double click on it.
Click on "Yes" to accept.
2.5 Printing the Screens and Message Files
As with the modfiles, although all of the necessary information for creating or
editing screens and messages is available from the OptiGrafix Editor, it is helpful
to have a printed list of the screens and messages available as a reference source.
How to print screens and messages is described elsewhere in this manual.
2.6 The User and System Editor
There are two separate applications associated with a "complete" screen set - a
system screen set and a user screen set. The system screen set contains screens
used for system type setup (saving/restoring setpoints, stopping timeslot, communications setup, troubleshooting, etc.). System screens will normally not be subject
to editing. The user screen set contains screens specific to the applications
involved (temperature, parison, hydraulics, etc.). User screens are normally those
that are edited and "customized" for very specific use by the end user. Because
there are two screen sets, there are also two different "levels" of editing associated
with the OptiGrafix Editor - a system level and a user level (the word "System" or
"User" appears on the title bar). There is very little actual difference in using the two
editor levels (working at the system level allows access to Page 3 Softkeys), but
the files created when linking are totally different!
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 9 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Note that the System editor and User editor are each supplied with an identical set
of message files (text, keywords, sprites). When editing messages for display on
User screens, make certain to work from the User editor. When editing messages
for display on System screens, make certain to work from the System editor.
Note also that even though Machine Function Keys can also be edited from the
System editor, be certain to edit the keys ONLY while working from the User editor.
2.7 After Editing Screens
Once editing is performed (either on screens, sprites or messages), before the
newly edited version can be transferred to the controller, the screens must be
"linked." Linking creates the files that are transferred to the controller. How to link
is described elsewhere in this instruction manual. After editing and linking the
screens, the files can be downloaded (transferred). How to transfer is described
elsewhere in this instruction manual.
2.8 Analog I/O Modfiles (Extrusion Applications only)
The values "Analog Output 1" through "Analog Output 4" were previously added
to the Analog I/O Modfile Version 2.9 (and to Hydraulic Version 3.2 firmware). The
system did not handle these values properly (because a setpoint with the same
"ID" already existed in the modfile). The OptiGrafix screen editor will indicate an
error when compiling with Version 2.9. The problem has been corrected in Version
2.D of the modfile. Anyone who has an interim version of this modfile (and is using
these values) should replace the modfile with Version 2.D (included with OptiGrafix
V3.3), delete the existing values from any screens on which they appear, and
replace them using the updated modfile. Note that Version 3.2 or later Hydraulic
firmware is required in order to display these values.
2.9 Application Specific Modfiles
With the addition of MACO 5000 Series controllers (for extrusion), it became
helpful to rename many of the control functions originally included in the hydraulic
modfile. These renamed functions are more generic in nature and are aimed at
extrusion applications. This more generic version of the hydraulic modfile is
labeled the "Analog I/O" modfile and should be used in place of the hydraulic
modfile for extrusion and blow molding applications.
2.10 Multi-Chassis Addressing
Each controller of a multi-chassis system has its own set of control relay system
addresses as follows:
Controller No. 1 ("Primary")
Controller No. 2
Controller No. 3
Controller No. 4

1
10,001
20,001
30,001

to 10,000
to 20,000
to 30,000
to 40,000

The addresses referred to in this manual are those of a primary controller.


Depending on which "secondary" controller is being programmed, just add 10,000
(20,000 or 30,000) to the primary controller address. Almost all control relays
repeat in a multi-chassis system. The few exceptions relate to recipes or some
SPC items (data handler modfile), print CR's or switch LED CR's (sequence
modfile), as well as the status CR's from the display processor, data handler, RS232 communications, and RS-485 communications modfiles.
Refer to the control relay tables (1640-IN-038-0-XX) for a complete list of CRs. The
table contains a column headed "Multi-Chassis Addressing?" Those CRs which
have a "yes" entry in that column can be written into the RLD if a multi-chassis
system is being utilized. With the exception of control relay addressing, multi1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 10 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


chassis operation is transparent to the RLD. All downloading and recipe storage
is done through Controller 1(the PC needs only to be connected to the RS-232
Card in Controller 1). Enable CRs for PC operation in Controller 1. Enable CRs for
Op Station operation in all controllers.

IMPORTANT: There is a group of sequence control relays (addresses 604-607)


relating to the number of digital I/O cards in a controller and high density I/O cards
which must be properly energized for each controller of a multi-rack system. These
CR's must be energized for EACH of the controllers (the addresses for Controller
No. 2 would be 10604-10607, etc.). Note that the controllers in a multi-rack system
do NOT have to be all of the same type (e.g., 12-Slot and 16-Slot systems can be
combined; different numbers of digital I/O can be combined; high density systems
and low density systems can be combined).
The "Other Racks are Optional" control relay (data handler modfile, system
address 658) is used in multi-rack systems to allow a rack to operate independently
of others. If this control relay is off, the other racks in the system are required. If this
control relay is on, the other racks in the system are optional. The control relay can
be applied to either the primary or secondary racks of a multi-chassis system.
When used in a primary rack, it denotes whether the secondary racks are required.
When used in a secondary rack, it denotes whether the primary rack is required.
These CR's would be used in the circumstance where all of the functions
necessary to run the machine were in Controller No. 1 and all of the optional
features were located in the other rack (e.g., extra mold temperature control). In
this case, CR 658 would be turned on so that the machine could cycle without the
second rack being present. A controller can thus continue to operate even if there
is a critical failure in the other controller. For example, if there was a failure in the
communications between racks or a failure of one of the racks, the status CR's
passed from one controller to the other would not change, but would remain at their
last transferred status.
If it is necessary for functions and I/O for machine motion to be in both Controller
No. 1 and Controller No. 2, the machine would not be able to function without the
second controller. In this case, CR 658 would not be turned on. The system would
be disabled (timeslot would go down) if the system is powered up without the
second controller. Both controllers will go down if there is a critical failure in either
controller.
The "Racks Not Present" control relay (data handler modfile, address 819) is used
to indicate the multi-rack link status. It will be off if the multi-rack link is operating
and will be on if the multi-rack link is not operating. This control relay can be applied
to both primary and secondary racks and can be used in the sequence logic to
disable/enable portions of the logic that might be interrelated with the logic in a
particular rack.
Control relay 10819 (and 20819) will be turned on at powerup. They will remain on
until the primary controller comes up. Once Rack-to-Rack (RTR) timeslot communication is established, CR 10819 (and 20819) will turn off. If communication with
the primary controller is lost or if there is a critical failure in the primary and timeslot
goes down, this CR will turn on within one (1) second.
Note: When counting boards in multi-rack systems (for switch settings, RLD/
screen programming) count each control rack separately. For example, if a multirack system consisted of two control racks, each with two temperature boards,
EACH controller would have a Temperature Board #1 and a Temperature Board
#2. The same numbering scheme holds true for all types of boards (including Input
and Output boards).
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 11 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


2.11 Miscellaneous Multi-Rack Information
Some options may have to be purchased for EACH controller of a multi-rack
system:
Statistical Process Control (SPC)
SPC is purchased only for the primary controller.
Line Graphs
Line Graphs must be purchased for EACH controller which has a Parison or Analog
I/O card that is to be viewed with a line graph screen (each controller captures its
own line graph traces).
The setpoints on the line graph screen are the property of the primary controller's
data handler. The primary controller's data handler issues commands across the
racks to the secondaries when a change is made to the channel selections, the
time base, or the sampling mode. Each controller is responsible for its own
sampling and making the data available (to its data handler). The primary
controller's data handler provides the operator station with values which tell the
operator station which controller has line graph data for each of the channels. The
system is still only able to display a total of four line graphs.
The RLD must be written to trigger all of the controllers at the same time (triggering
is NOT passed from rack to rack automatically as part of the line graph operation).
The Math Function
The Math function must be purchased with EACH controller that is to perform math
within it. The math function does not need to be present in secondary controllers
in order for the primary controller to access and change data within the secondaries. The math function in secondary controllers can only reference parameters
from its own controller. Primary controller SCAN commands (used to trigger a math
function) should not use any parameters from a secondary controller.
2.12 Determining the Number of Racks
The number of racks in a system is determined from the timeslot header from RLD
(NOT from the user or system screens). The RLD program determines this
information automatically, depending on the addresses used within the logic.
There are three bytes involved in the determination. One byte is used to tell the total
number of racks in the system. A second byte is used to tell how many sequence
cards are required in each rack. A third byte is used to verify that the timeslot file
is located in the correct controller number. The primary controller's data handler
makes this information available to the operator station for recipe transfers, screen
transfers, or RLD transfers from system to cartridge.
2.13 Multi-Rack and Cartridges
When a recipe is copied to a cartridge, there will automatically be an entry
generated for each controller in the system. These entries must be located on the
cartridge in consecutive order. Data is read from the first controller and saved, then
data is read from the second controller and saved, etc. The recipe will not copy to
cartridge unless the recipes from all controllers in the system fit on the cartridge.
When a recipe is copied from a cartridge back to the system, it is copied in reverse
order (the recipe of the last controller is copied first, etc.). It may be easier to tell
when the transfer is complete if the BLK/SB for each controller is located on the
recipe transfer screen. Recipes for secondary racks of a multi-rack control system
cannot be deleted individually. When the recipe for the first rack is deleted, recipes
for the other racks will automatically be deleted at the same time.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 12 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


2.14 Mulit-Rack Operation and System Commands
The system commands in the system screen sets provided with a multi-rack
controller have their "Controller Number" ("Rack") set to "0," which is the broadcast
address. This address causes these commands to be performed at the same time
by all controllers in the system. Note that the broadcast address must only be used
for the system commands, which are:
Save Setpoints
Restore Setpoints
Disable Outputs
Enable Outputs
Reset System
Stop Timeslot
Save Hardware Setup
2.15 Operating with "Partial" Systems
Temperature Board Minimum Setpoint
A setpoint ("Temperature Brd Minimum") was added to the Data Handler modfile
in order to allow a system to run with fewer temperature boards in a controller than
are programmed into the RLD. A common RLD can then be used for a system with
a variable number of temperature boards. The RLD should be written for the
maximum number of boards that will be present.
Each controller in a system will have its own setpoint. It should be entered and
saved as the minimum number of temperature boards necessary to run a machine.
The setpoint is checked on system powerup. If a temperature board is not present,
but its number is greater than this setpoint, timeslot will be allowed to start. Missing
temperature cards will be marked with an asterisk on the timeslot configuration
screen. The data for temperature cards not present will be cleared by the sequence
card so that temperature outputs or alarms are not set for temperature cards that
are not present. Note that this does not allow boards to be replaced "on the fly."
The system must be shut down to replace a board.
Screen Header Verification Setpoint
A setpoint ("Scrn Header Verification") was added to the Data Handler modfile in
order to allow the system to run when the system or user screens loaded into a
secondary controller are different from those of the primary controller. It was added
for instances where the secondary controllers are used for auxiliary temperature
control, but are not necessary to operate the machine. If the setpoint is used, then
the screens used in secondary controllers do not have to match the "link" date of
those in the primary controller. Headers must still match within a particular
controller.
The setpoint is used only in the primary controller. If the setpoint is not used (or is
set to "0"), then on powerup the primary controller will verify the screen headers
on all controllers in the system. If any do not match, timeslot will be taken down in
ALL of the controllers. If this setpoint is set to "1" and the screen headers do not
match, the system will be allowed to start.

WARNING:
This option must be used with great care! Users MUST make certain that the
machine function key definitions match in ALL of the screen sets used. An
erroneous key definition could cause damage to the machine or injury to operating
personnel.
RLD Header Verification Setpoint
A setpoint ("RLD Header Verification") was added to the Data Handler modfile in
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 13 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


order to allow the system to run when the RLD loaded into a secondary controller
is different from that of the primary controller. It was added for instances where the
secondary controllers are used for auxiliary temperature control, but are not
necessary to operate the machine. If the setpoint is used, then the RLDs used in
secondary controllers do not have to match the compiler date of that in the primary
controller. Headers must still match within a particular controller.
The setpoint is used only in the primary controller. If the setpoint is not used (or is
set to "0"), then on powerup the primary controller will verify the RLD headers on
all controllers in the system. If any do not match, timeslot will be taken down in ALL
of the controllers. If this setpoint is set to "1" and the RLD headers do not match,
the system will be allowed to start.
CAUTION:
This option must be used with great care! If it is to be used, the instructions below
must be followed:
After RLD is executed within a rack, the sequence builds a set of data to be sent
to the other controllers, consisting of the control relays that will be tested by the
other controllers (the RLD compiler determines this list at compile time). The
sequence modules "pack" these CR's in the order in which they are used in the
RLD (the first used are the first packed).
Precautions must be taken to insure that the packing order remains the same even
if the RLD is modified. A couple of rungs of RLD can be added to the beginning of
the RLD in order to predetermine the packing order. These rungs must be placed
AFTER high priority RLD.
To insure proper packing, use one "EC" (an unused Temporary CR) for each
controller. The test instructions for each rung would consist of all test instructions
from other controllers used within that particular controller.
If the RLD was modified at a later date, any added test instructions would be placed
after (or to the right of) all of the test instructions already used. If more control relays
are tested in a rack than are passed to the rack, those control relays will be off.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 14 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Appl.:
Editor: none
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Appl.:
Editor:
Char set:
Char size:
Snap:
Sound:

3. Main Menu
From anywhere on the hard drive, type:
OPTIGRAF

(return)

The Main menu (shown above) appears. "Application," "ToolBox" and "Help" are
the only menu selections available.
The items appearing along the left side of the screen indicate either default or
previously decided settings.
"Appl" is the currently selected screen set (may be blank on powerup).
"Editor" is the currently selected editing function (may be "none" on powerup).
Once a screen set is selected an editor icon will appear on the menu bar and an
editor can be selected. Editors include the screen editor, template editor, message
editors (3 separate message editors - text messages, keywords and sprites),
security editor, math editor, and the machine function key editor.
"Char set" is the currently selected character set. Either the default or previously
selected set will appear on powerup. There are four choices (ASCII, Japanese,
Korean and Special). Go to the "Toolbox" to select a character set.
"Char size" is the currently selected character size.
For the EL display, each character set has a small and large version:
ASCII:
Small is 8 pixels wide by 16 pixels long.
Large is 16 pixels wide by 32 pixels long.
Japanese, Korean and Special:
Small is 16 pixels wide by 16 pixels long.
Large is 32 pixels wide by 32 pixels long.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 15 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


For an LCD display, each character set has one size:
ASCII:
8 pixels wide by 8 pixels long.
Japanese, Korean and Special:
16 pixels wide by 16 pixels long.
Go to the "Toolbox" to select a character size.
"Snap" indicates whether elements placed on the screen will snap to the invisible
grid or whether they will remain exactly as placed by the user. Grid size will match
the selected character size. "Snap" is enabled on powerup. Once either the screen
editor or sprite editor is open, go to the "Toolbox" and enable or disable snap.
"Sound" indicates whether the annoying beeper is enabled or disabled. Go to the
"Toolbox" to disable sound.
Making Selections from the Menu
Each menu bar item contains a single capitalized (and highlighted) letter. To see
the choices under each item, either type the highlighted letter or position the pointer
over the top of the word and press (and hold) the left mouse button. The menu will
extend downward.
The Left and Right arrow keys can also be used to move from selection to selection
across the menu bar.
Depending on the menu bar item selected, a number of further selections will
appear. Items that appear as solid type are valid further choices. Items that appear
as "shaded" type are not available for one reason or another (they may require
another or different choice somewhere else in the menu). If an item is followed by
an ellipsis (...), a further selection is necessary.
To make a selection from within the menu, either type the highlighted letter within
the menu item or position the pointer (now a small hand) over the item (and release
the mouse button) or use the Up /Down arrow keys to highlight an item (and press
return). The Right arrow key can be used to select items followed by an ellipsis.
Making Selections from a Window
Some menu choices will cause windows to appear on the screen. In order to make
choices from within the window, first highlight the item (using the mouse or the
arrow keys, or in some cases the Tab key) and then either double-click on the item
or press return. Buttons which appear in the windows will each have a capitalized,
highlighted letter. Either click the mouse directly on the button or type the
capitalized letter.
Many window entries amount to making a choice from a list (another window) of
valid selections. In those cases, first highlight the area where the entry is to be
made, then either double click the mouse on that area or press return. Once the
list of valid selections appears, use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight the chosen
selection and then either double click the mouse on the selection or press return.
For those window entries requiring a typed entry (naming screens, sprites,
applications, etc.), first highlight the area where the entry is to be made (the

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 16 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


underline cursor will change from white to green) and then type in the proper name
or title. Follow the directions at the bottom of the repective menu.
Moving Around on the Editing Area
Once either the screen or sprite editor is opened, expanded menu items appear.
The Tab key can be used to move from menu bar to editing area to softkey area.
Once within the chosen area, the arrow keys can be used to either locate a
particular selection or move to a specific location. The function keys (F1 through
F8) can be used to select a graphic icon.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 17 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 18 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Select. . .
Char set:
Utilities. . .
Char size:
Linker. . .
Snap:
Report generator. . .
Sound:
Exit to dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help
System
User

A User Screen Set can only be edited using the User Editor.
A System Screen Set can only be edited using the System Editor.

3.1 Application
The application menu is used to make "major" selections relating to display type,
file locations, printing, etc. Select the application menu by typing "A" (the highlighted letter) or positioning the pointer over the top of the word "Application" and
pressing (and holding) the left mouse button. The word "Application" will highlight
and the menu will extend downward.
3.1.1 Editor Type
Editor type is used to choose between the System or User screen editor.
The system screen set contains screens used for system type setup (saving/
restoring setpoints, stopping timeslot, communications setup, troubleshooting,
etc.). System screens will normally not be subject to editing. The user screen set
contains screens specific to the applications involved (temperature, parison,
hydraulics, etc.). User screens are normally those that are edited and "customized"
for very specific use by the end user.
Either type a "T" or position the pointer over the words "editor Type" and release
the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "editor Type" and press return.
The "System" editor allows system screens and message files to be edited. The
"User" editor allows user screens and message files to be edited. Once a choice
is made, that choice will be displayed on the title line.
There is very little actual difference in using the two editor types (working at the
system level allows access to Page 3 Softkeys).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 19 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Toolbox

Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Select. . .
Char set:
Utilities. . .
Char size:
Linker. . .
Snap:
Report generator. . .
Sound:
Exit to dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help
El 41aa . . .
Lcd 41ax . . .

Existing
New
Select an application

PATH:
C:\BCED\EL\injuser

Accept Std Inj User


Yes

No

DIRECTORIES and DRIVES


. .
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:

APPLICATION FILE NAMES


Std Inj User

Accept

(or Alt A)

Cancel

(or Alt

Only valid selections will appear in the Application File Names window
(those that correspond to the selected Editor Type and Display type)
3.1.2 Select
Select is used to select a screen set. The three dots indicate a further choice
between display types and an existing or a new screen set.
The choice of displays (EL or LCD) is dictated by the operator station that was
purchased with the controller.
Once an existing or new screen set is selected, "Editor" will appear on the main
menu bar. The editor menu gives access to the actual editor programs (screen,
template, messages, security, math and machine function keys).
3.1.2.1 Existing
A window titled "Select an Application" will overlay the screen.
The present path will be displayed.
Two windows will be displayed within the overlay. The window on the left is titled
" Directories and Drives." It will contain a list of possible drives as well as a list of
the child directories (if any) of the current directory (the current directory will be the
last directory displayed in the path). If the current directory contains any applications, the names of those applications will be displayed in the window on the right.
Changing Drives or Directories
To change the current drive or directory, the menu bar behind the title "Directories
and Drives" must be highlighted cyan (the light blue-green that matches the
background of the present path). The tab key can be used to toggle between the
two windows or the mouse button can be clicked (once!) on the dark green area

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 20 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


in either window in order to select that particular window.
Once the drives and directories window is highlighted, a particular drive or
directory must be chosen from the list.
Once a drive or directory is highlighted, double-click on the selection or press
return ("Accept" can be used IF the proper application happens to be highlighted).
The Double Period Selection
If the displayed path is NOT a root directory, the selection at the top of the list of
drives and directories will be a double period.
Double-clicking on this selection (or pressing return) will back the path up by one
directory. Child directories (sub-directories of the present directory) of the new
path will appear in the drives and directories window. Any applications on the
current directory will be displayed in the application file names window.

Enter new application name

Accept

(or Alt A)

Cancel

(or Alt C)

Choosing a Particular Application


Once the proper drive and directory have been identified and chosen, the
application will be listed somewhere on the application file names window.
Highlight the application file names window by pressing the tab key or clicking
anywhere within the window (except the menu bar).
Canceling (click on "Cancel") any time up to this point will return the program to the
main menu.
With the proper application highlighted (and the applica- tions file name highlighted), either double click on the application or single click on "Accept" or press
return.
A small overlay with the question "Accept FILENAME?" will appear. To accept,
either type "Y" or click on "Yes."
Any other action will be treated as a "No" and will cause the small overlay to
disappear. Once the small overlay disappears, either cancel to return to the main
menu or select a different application and continue.
Once an application has been accepted, the large overlay will disappear and the
chosen application will be open for editing. The name of the application will appear
after "Appl" on the left side of the menu.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 21 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


3.1.2.2 New
Either type an "N" or position the pointer over the word "New" and click the mouse
or use the arrow keys to highlight "New" and press return.
A window titled "Select the directory to CREATE application" will overlay the
screen. The present path will be displayed.
Two windows will be displayed within the overlay. The window on the left is titled
"Directories and Drives." It will contain a list of possible drives as well as a list of
the child directories (if any) of the current directory (the current directory will be
the last directory displayed in the path). If the current directory contains any
applications, the names of those applications will be displayed in the window on
the right.
Changing Drives or Directories
To change the current drive or directory, the menu bar behind the title "Directories
and Drives" must be highlighted cyan (the light blue-green that matches the
background of the present path). The tab key can be used to toggle between the
two windows or the mouse button can be clicked (once!) on the dark green area
in either window in order to select that particular window. Once the drives and
directories window is highlighted, a particular drive or directory must be chosen
from the list. Once one is highlighted, either double-click on the selection, or single
click on "Accept" or press return.
Naming a New Application
Once the proper drive and directory have been identified and chosen, the large
overlay will disappear.
A small overlay with the statement "Enter new application name" will appear. Use
the keyboard to type in a unique name for the application.
Application names can be up to 28 characters long. All keyboard characters are
valid (this is NOT a DOS filename) and spaces may also be used.

Do NOT name the application ADBNNN...


(where N is any number)
Typing more than 28 characters will cause the underline cursor to wrap around to
the beginning of the title. The 29th character would replace the first character, etc..
Incorrect characters can be backspaced out of the title.
Click on "Cancel" or press "ESC" to abort the process.
Once a proper title is typed in, click on "Accept."
The small overlay will disappear and be replaced by a large overlay titled "Choose
a Modfile Path."

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 22 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
none
Editor: none
Select. . .
El 41aa ...
Char
set: Ascii
Ascii
Char set:
Utilities. . .
Lcd 41ax ...
Char
size: 8x16
8x16
Char size:
Linker. . .
Snap:
Snap: Disabled
Disabled
Snap:
Report generator. . .
Sound:
Sound: Disabled
Disabled
Sound:
Exit to dos
PATH:
C:\BCED\MODFILES

Existing
New
Choose a Modfile Path

DIRECTORIES and DRIVES


. .
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:

MODULE FILE NAMES


Sequence
Temperature
Hydraulic
Parison
Display Proc.
Data Handler

Accept

(or Alt A)

2.4
3.0
2.9
3.3
3.0
3.0

Cancel

(or Alt C)

Choosing a Modfile Path


Once a new application name has been accepted, a large overlay titled "Choose
a Modfile Path" will appear.
The present path will be displayed.
Two windows will be displayed within the overlay. The window on the left is titled
"Directories and Drives." It will contain a list of possible drives as well as a list of
the child directories (if any) of the current directory (the current directory will be the
last directory displayed in the path). If the current directory contains any module
files (modfiles), the names of those modfiles will be displayed in the window on the
right. Note that it is not necessary for the modfiles to be present at this time. The
modfiles can be stored in the chosen directory at a later time, but they MUST be
present before any screen editing or printing is attempted!
Once the proper modfiles appear in the "Module Filenames" window, click on
accept.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 23 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Editor:
Select.none
..
Char
Char
set:
set: Ascii
Utilities.
..
Char
Char
size:. .8x16
Linker.
Snap:
Snap:
Disabled
Report
generator. . .
Sound:
Sound:
Exit to Disabled
dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Edit appl name


Delete appl
copy From.. to...
mOve application...
copy applicatioN...
dos Shell
change Modfile path
Transfer...
Purge application

3.1.3 Utilities
Utilities is a multi-purpose menu used to edit application names, delete existing
applications, create new applications, shell to DOS, change an application's
modfile path or transfer the linked application to a controller.
Either type a "U" or position the pointer over the word "Utilities" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Utilities" and press return.
A menu will appear displaying nine choices:
Edit appl name
Delete appl
copy From.. to...
mOve application...
copy applicatioN...
dos Shell
change Modfile path
Transfer...
Purge application

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 24 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Editor:
Select.none
..
Char
Char
set:
set: Ascii
Utilities.
..
Char
Char
size:. .8x16
Linker.
Snap:
Snap:
Disabled
Report
generator. . .
Sound:
Sound:
Exit to Disabled
dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Edit appl name


Current
Delete appl
El 41aa...
System
copy From.. to...
Lcd 41ax... User
mOve application...
copy applicatioN...
dos Shell
change Modfile path
Transfer...
Change application name from:
Purge application
APPLICATION NAME
To:

Accept

(or Alt A)

Cancel

(or Alt C)

3.1.3.1 Edit Application Name


Either type an "E" or position the pointer over the words "Edit appl name" and click
the mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Edit appl name" and press return.
A window titled "Select the application to rename" will overlay the screen.
With the proper application highlighted (and the applica- tions file name highlighted), either double click on the application or single click on "Accept" or press
return.
A small overlay with the question "Accept APPLICATION NAME?" will appear. To
accept, click on "Yes."
Any other action will be treated as a "No" and will cause the small overlay to
disappear. Once the small overlay disappears, either cancel to return to the main
menu or select a different application and continue.
Changing the Name of an Application
Once the proper application has been identified and chosen, the large overlay will
disappear.
A small overlay with the statement "Change application name from:" will appear.
Use the keyboard to type in a unique new name for the application.
Application names can be up to 28 characters long. All keyboard characters are
valid (this is NOT a DOS filename) and spaces may also be used. "Accepting" the
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 25 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


application name writes the application name (and OptiGrafix Rel X.X) into the file
adbxxxx.hdr.

IMPORTANT!
Do NOT name the application ADBNNN...
(where N is any number)
Typing more than 28 characters will cause the underline cursor to wrap around to
the beginning of the title. The 29th character would replace the first character, etc..
Incorrect characters can be backspaced out of the title.
Click on "Cancel" or press "ESC" to abort the process.
Once a proper title is typed in, click on "Accept."
The small overlay will disappear.

Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor: none
Editor:
Select. . .
Char set:
set: Ascii
Char
Utilities. . .
Char size: 8x16
Linker. . .
Snap: Disabled
Snap:
Report generator. . .
Sound: Disabled
Sound:
Exit to dos

Edit appl name


Current
Delete appl
El 41aa...
copy From.. to...
System
mOve application... Lcd 41ax... User
copy applicatioN...
Create appl
Select an application to DELETE
dos Shell
PATH:
change Modfile path
C:\BCED\EL\injuserTransfer...
Delete Std Inj User ?
Yes
No
DIRECTORIES and DRIVES
. .
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Accept

(or Alt A)
1640-IN-006-0-02

APPLICATION FILE NAMES


Std Inj User

Cancel

(or Alt C)

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 26 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


3.1.3.2 Delete Application
Either type a "D" or position the pointer over the words "Delete appl" and click the
mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Delete appl" and press return.
Continue the selection process until the proper application is highlighted or
selected.
A small overlay will appear, questioning whether or not to continue. To accept, click
on "Yes."
Any other action will be treated as a "No" and will cause the small overlay to
disappear. Once the small overlay disappears, either cancel to return to the main
menu or select a different application and continue.
Once an application has been deleted, the overlays disappear and the program is
at the main menu.

Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor: none
Editor:
Select. . .
Char set:
set:
Char
Utilities. Ascii
..
Char size: 8x16
Char
Linker. . .
Snap: Disabled
Snap:
Report generator. . .
Sound: Disabled
Sound:
Exit to dos

1640-IN-006-0-02

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Edit appl name


Delete appl
Current
copy From.. to...
El 41aa...
System
mOve application...
Lcd 41ax... User
copy applicatioN...
dos Shell
Select Source
change Modfile path
Screens
Transfer...
Sprites
Purge application
Text
Keywords
Mach function keys
Security
Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 27 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


3.1.3.3 Copy From.. To...
This menu item is used to copy individual elements (a screen, a sprite, etc.) within
a single application or from one application to another. Either type an "F" or position
the pointer over the words "copy From..to..." and click the mouse or use the arrow
keys to highlight "copy From..to..." and press return.
Continue the selection process until the proper applications are identified. If a new
application is needed, create the application BEFORE starting this procedure
(refer to section 3.1.2.2).
Once both a "from" and "to" application have been identified, a small window
labeled "Select Source" will appear. Choose any one of the elements shown in the
window. Once the source has been identified, a specific individual element can be
chosen from the next window to appear.
Once a specific element has been chosen, that element will be copied into the
application identified earlier. The program will respond with a message explaining
what has occurred. A copied screen or sprite will appear at the end of whatever
application to which it has been copied.

Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Editor:
Select.none
..
Char
Char
set:
set: Ascii
Utilities.
..
Char
Char
size:. .8x16
Linker.
Snap:
Snap:
Disabled
Report
generator. . .
Sound:
Sound:
Exit to Disabled
dos

1640-IN-006-0-02

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Edit appl name


Delete appl
copy From.. to...
mOve application... Current
copy applicatioN...
El 41aa...
System
dos Shell
Lcd 41ax... User
change Modfile path
Transfer...
Purge application

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 28 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Editor:
Select.none
..
Char
Char
set:
set: Ascii
Utilities.
..
Char
Char
size:. .8x16
Linker.
Snap:
Snap:
Disabled
Report
generator. . .
Sound:
Sound:
Exit to Disabled
dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Edit appl name


Delete appl
copy From.. to...
mOve application... Current
copy applicatioN...
El 41aa...
System
dos Shell
Lcd 41ax... User
change Modfile path
Transfer...
Purge application

3.1.3.4 Move Application


This menu item is used to move entire applications from one directory to another.
Either type an "O" or position the pointer over the words "mOve application" and
click the mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "mOve application" and press
return.
Continue the selection process until the application to be moved is identified.
Once a specific application has been identified, a directory to move the application
to must be identified. Only existing directories can be used as the destination (if a
new directory is needed, create the directory BEFORE starting this procedure).
Once a directory has been identified, the program will copy the files from the
application into the chosen directory and, in the process, overwrite the editing
screen with a DOS prompt informing you that the files have been copied.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 29 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Editor:
Select.none
..
Char
Char
set:
set: Ascii
Utilities.
..
Char
Char
size:. .8x16
Linker.
Snap:
Snap:
Disabled
Report
generator. . .
Sound:
Sound:
Exit to Disabled
dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Edit appl name


Delete appl
copy From.. to...
mOve application...
copy applicatioN...
Current
dos Shell
El 41aa...
System
change Modfile path Lcd 41ax... User
Transfer...
Purge application

3.1.3.5 Copy Application


This menu item is used to duplicate entire applications. Either type an "N" or
position the pointer over the words "copy applicatioN" and click the mouse or use
the arrow keys to highlight "copy applicatioN" and press return.
Continue the selection process until the application to be copied is identified.
Once a specific application has been identified, a directory to copy the application
to must be identified. Only existing directories can be used as the destination (if a
new directory is needed, create the directory BEFORE starting this procedure).
Once a directory has been identified, the program will copy the files from the
application into the chosen directory and overwrite the editing screen with a DOS
prompt informing the user that the files are being copied.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 30 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Editor:
Select.none
..
Char
Char
set:
set: Ascii
Utilities.
..
Char
Char
size:. .8x16
Linker.
Snap:
Snap:
Disabled
Report
generator. . .
Sound:
Sound:
Exit to Disabled
dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Edit appl name


Delete appl
copy From.. to...
mOve application...
copy applicatioN...
dos Shell
change Modfile path
Transfer...
Purge application

3.1.3.6 DOS Shell


This menu item is used to exit directly to the DOS shell without ending the editing
session. Shelling to DOS allows simple DOS-level operations to be performed
without leaving the OptiGrafix software. Either type an "S" or position the pointer
over the words "dos Shell" and click the mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight
"dos Shell" and press return.
The computer will immediately return to the DOS shell. It is not necessary to save
work performed in the editor package before going to the DOS shell (although
it is recommended).
To return to the editor package from the DOS shell, type the word "exit" and press
return. OptiGrafix will return as it was left (without going through the powerup
routine).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 31 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Editor:
Select.none
..
Char
Char
set:
set: Ascii
Utilities.
..
Char
Char
size:. .8x16
Linker.
Snap:
Snap:
Disabled
Report
generator. . .
Sound:
Sound:
Exit to Disabled
dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Edit appl name


Delete appl
copy From.. to...
mOve application...
copy applicatioN...
dos Shell
change Modfile path
Transfer...
Purge application
Choose a Modfile Path

PATH:
C:\BCED\MODFILES

DIRECTORIES and DRIVES


. .
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Accept

(or Alt A)

MODULE FILE NAMES


2.4
Sequence
Temperature 3.0
2.9
Hydraulic
3.3
Parison
Display Proc. 3.0
Data Handler 3.0
Cancel

(or Alt C)

3.1.3.7 Change Modfile Path


This menu item is used to change the modfile path used by the present application.
Either type an "M" or position the pointer over the words "change Modfile path" and
click the mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "change Modfile path" and press
return.
A large overlay titled "Choose a Modfile Path" will appear. The present path will be
displayed.
Two windows will be displayed within the overlay. The window on the left is titled
"Directories and Drives." It will contain a list of possible drives as well as a list of
the child directories (if any) of the current directory (the current directory will be the
last directory displayed in the path). If the current directory contains any module
files (modfiles), the names of those modfiles will be displayed in the window on the
right. Note that it is not necessary for the modfiles to be present at this time. The
modfiles can be stored in the chosen directory at a later time, but they MUST be
present before any screen editing or printing is attempted!
To change the current drive or directory, the menu bar behind the title "Directories
and Drives" must be highlighted cyan (the light blue-green color that matches the
background of the present path). The tab key can be used to toggle between the
two windows or the mouse button can be clicked (once) on the dark green area in
either window in order to select that particular window.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 32 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Once the drives and directories window is highlighted, a particular drive or
directory must be chosen from the list.
Once the proper modfiles appear in the "Module Filenames" window, click on
accept.
Note that the Modfile paths were established by the OptiGrafix software during
installation and normally should NOT need to be modified.

Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Editor:
Select.none
..
Char
Char
set:
set: Ascii
Utilities.
..
Char
Char
size:. .8x16
Linker.
Snap:
Snap:
Disabled
Report
generator. . .
Sound:
Sound:
Exit to Disabled
dos

1640-IN-006-0-02

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Edit appl name


Delete appl
copy From.. to...
mOve application...
copy applicatioN...
dos Shell
change Modfile path
Transfer...
Current
Purge application
El 41aa...
System
Lcd 41ax... User
Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 33 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


3.1.3.8 Transfer
This menu item is used to access the transfer program used to download files to
the controller. Note that before downloading (transferring) newly edited files
(screens, sprites, messages), the files must be "linked" using the linker routine
described elsewhere in this manual.
Note also that before downloading can be accomplished, the controller and the
computer must be connected to one another and the controller must have an
operator station connected to it.
The controller requires a cable with a Female DB9 connector at one end. The serial
port on the computer will dictate the connector at the other end. Refer to the
Appendixes (or the Installation & Wiring manual) for the proper cables and pinouts.
Either type a "T" and press return or position the pointer over the word "Transfer"
and click the mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Transfer" and press return.
The program will exit the editor and change to a monochrome display menu similar
to the one shown on the next page. Use the arrow keys to position the reverse video
cursor over "Select COM port" and press return. The currently selected communications port will be asterisked. Use the arrow keys to position the reverse video
cursor over the proper communications port and press return. Pressing return will
set the communications port and return the program to the original menu.
Do the same thing for baud rate and timeout delay. For the baud rate, 9600
generally works best, but make certain that the computer and controller agree. For
the timeout delay, if uncertain of the clock speed, choose a higher clock speed from
the menu (once these settings have been made, as long as the transfer routine is
accessed from OptiGrafix, the settings entered here should remain). Line power
should be ON to the controller and the operator station. If system screens are
present in the controller, be sure Timeslot is OFF (see the controller's system
control/ system functions screen).
For EL displays, if system screens need to be downloaded, then user screens must
also be downloaded and they must be downloaded AFTER system screens. Once
a valid set of system screens has been downloaded, user screens can be edited
and downloaded repeatedly (without downloading system screens). For LCD
displays, any change to the system or user screen set will require downloading of
the system screen set followed by the user screen set.
The Transfer routine main menu allows for selection of complete groups of files
(the user screen files or the system screen files) for transfer either to "System" (the
controller) or to "Cartridge" (an Insta-Set Cartridge installed in the operator
station). Note that timeslot and RLD files are NOT created in the OptiGrafix editor
package and cannot be transferred using this menu.
In addition to the selections for groups of files, there are also selections for
individual files. Choosing either the individual user files or system files will cause
a different menu to appear which lists each of the files in either the user or system
set. The individual file option is provided as a time saving device. If in doubt,
download the entire set from the main menu. Use the arrow keys to highlight:
Write System Screen files to Controller
and press return.
For systems with an LCD operator station, after the files have transferred, turn OFF
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 34 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


power to the controller for at least 5 seconds and then turn it back on. (this resets
the system and gives it a chance to rewrite and compare file headers, etc.). (EL
operator stations will automatically reset after screens are downloaded.)
Once the proper system screens are installed (and with Timeslot still OFF), use the
arrow keys to highlight:
Write User Screen files to Controller
and press return.
Once again, for systems with an LCD operator station, after the files have
transferred, turn OFF power to the controller for at least 5 seconds and then turn
it back on.
This completes downloading of the screen files. At this point, it is possible to
examine the screens on the operator station. The controller itself will not function
until the RLD files have been downloaded and the system is reset and repowered
to start Timeslot.
SELECT ACTION TO BE TAKEN

(V03.XX)

Write Timeslot & RLD files


Write User Screen files
Write System Screen files

to Controller
to Controller
to Controller

Write Timeslot & RLD files


Write User Screen files
Write System Screen files

to Cartridge
to Cartridge
to Cartridge

SELECT SINGLE FILE TO BE SENT

Write RLD individual files


Write User individual files
Write System individual files

Select COM port


Select Baud Rate
Set Timeout Delay
Return

Write User Files

to Controller

Write User Modfile


Write User Configuration
Write User SPC labels file
Write User Line graph descriptor
Write User Math function file
Write User Screen file
Write User Modfile
Write User Configuration
Write User SPC labels file
Write User Line graph descriptor
Write User Math function file
Write User Screen file

to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to

Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
Cartridge
Cartridge
Cartridge
Cartridge
Cartridge
Cartridge

Select Controller
Return to Menu
Controller #1

SELECT TRANSFER BAUD RATE

SELECT EXISTING SERIAL PORT

COM 1:
COM 2:
COM 3:
COM 4:
Return to Menu

9600 Baud
4800 Baud
2400 Baud
1200 Baud
Return to Menu

SELECT COMPUTER CLOCK SPEED

SELECT CONTROLLER TO BE LOADED

Clock speed of 4.77 Mhz (IBM PC)


Clock speed of 6.0 Mhz
Clock speed of 8.0 Mhz (IBM AT)
Clock speed of 10.0 Mhz
Clock speed of 12.0 Mhz
Clock speed of 16.0 Mhz (80386)
Clock speed of 20.0 Mhz
Clock speed of 25.0 Mhz
Clock speed of 33.0 Mhz
Clock speed of 50.0 Mhz
Clock speed of 66.0 Mhz
Return to Menu

Select Controller #1
Select Controller #2
Select Controller #3
Select Controller #4
Return to Menu

Controller #1

Note that when transferring screen files to an LCD operator station, a "FILE TIMEOUT ERROR"
will occur at the end of the transfer.
This is a normal occurence and does not effect the transfer process.
Note that RLD and Timeslot files CANNOT be transferred using this transfer routine.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 35 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Toolbox

Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor: none
Editor:
Select. . .
Char set:
set: Ascii
Char
Utilities. . .
Char size: 8x16
Linker. . .
Snap: Disabled
Snap:
Report generator. . .
Sound: Disabled
Sound:
Exit to dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Edit appl name


Delete appl
copy From.. to...
mOve application...
copy applicatioN...
dos Shell
change Modfile path
Transfer...
Purge application

Purging screen
configuration - Please
Wait

C:\BCED\ELOP\ADB0000\default .txt
SETPOINT - Profile A Pnt 1 Size
from profile element.

Element missing in
screen config Aborting
process

Elements not found in scrn.cfg, set config parameters to default?


Yes

Ok

No

3.1.3.9 Purge Application


If a value or setpoint is at first used on a screen and then removed, it will still exist
in the screen configuration file (SCRN.CFG). This menu item is used to "purge" the
screen configuration file of unused values and setpoints.
Purging causes all screens in the application to be checked. A new config. file will
be built based on the setpoints and values actually found in the screens. If an
element is encountered that did not occur in the original config. file (an "undefined"
element), a question box asking "set config parameters to default?" will appear.
Answering "Yes" will cause all undefined elements to be defined using each
element's default parameters (see modfile printout).
Answering "No" will cause the particular form used to define an element to appear
each time an undefined element is encountered in a screen editing session.
Follow the "normal" procedure for editing the entries to the form (refer to the
particular elements).
Note that at this point (with the element definition form displayed) clicking on
"Accept" will cause the displayed definition to be used.
Clicking on "Cancel" will cancel any newly edited entries for that element and will
cause the element's parameters to return to whatever was in the form when it
appeared.
Note that purging will abort if an element is missing from the configuration file. If
an element is missing, the screen must be loaded and the elements described in
the text window must be located and corrected (and the screen saved). To close
the text window, click on the upper right hand corner button.
Purging will not have to be performed often unless screens are copied into an
application.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 36 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Editor: none
Select. . .
Char
Char set:
set: Ascii
Utilities. . .
Char
Char size: 8x16
Linker. . .
Snap:
Snap: Disabled
Report generator. . .
Sound:
Sound: Disabled
Exit to dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Link current
Custom link. . .
Error report. . .

Linker

POWERUP

Building

Dynamic Elements

Errors

0
Cancel

(or Alt C)

3.1.4 Linker
This menu item is used to create the files which are used to download the screen
files and related information to the display. "Linking" is the process that combines
the various screen elements into a set of files which can be transferred to the
operator station. The download files created by linking are:
for system screen files:
SYS_LNK.OBJ
SYS_CON.OBJ, SYS_CON.M2, SYS_CON.M3, etc.
SYS_VER.OBJ, SYS_VER.M2, SYS_VER.M3, etc.
for user screen files:
SCRN_LNK.OBJ
SCRN_CON.OBJ, SCRN_CON.M2, SCRN_CON.M3, etc.
SCRN_VER.OBJ, SCRN_VER.M2, SCRN_VER.M3, etc.
SCRN_SPC.OBJ
SCRN_MTH.OBJ, SCRN_MTH.M2, SCRN_MTH.M3, etc.
SCRN_LGR.OBJ
(Both LNK.OBJ files are stored in the operator station; all remaining files are stored
in the data handler.)
Either type an "L" or position the pointer over the word "Linker" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Linker" and press return.
A menu will appear displaying three choices:
Link current
Custom link
Error report
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 37 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


3.1.4.1 Link Current
This menu item is used to link the entire current application. A small overlay titled
"Linker" will appear. The title of the screen presently being linked will appear in the
upper left corner of the window. As elements are linked, they will cycle through the
small window titled "Building." If errors occur during the linking process, they will
be totaled as they occur and the total number of errors will be displayed in the small
window titled "Errors."
If no linking errors occur, once the linking is complete the linker window will
disappear and be replaced by a smaller window containing the message "NO
ERRORS." Click on "Ok." If linking errors occur, once linking is complete the linker
window will disappear and be replaced by a larger window titled "Linker Error
Report" (which is identical to the Error Report menu selection).
If the explanation of a specific error begins with "WARNING," the occurrence of that
error is not fatal.
If the explanation of a specific error begins with any other word, the occurrence of
that error is fatal and the .OBJ file associated with the error has not been generated.
The error must be corrected before linking can be completed. See the Appendixes
for a list of the Linker Error Messages.
The .OBJ files are corrupted if the linker is cancelled during "linking." Make certain
the "link" function is complete before attempting to transfer files to the controller.
Note that after "making" a math file, a "link" must be performed. Note also that after
any editing (screens, messages, math, security, SPC config, line graph config, or
machine function keys) a "link" must be performed.

Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
none
Editor:
Select. . .
Char
set:
Ascii
Char
set:
Utilities. . .
Char
size: 8x16
Char
Linker. . .
Snap:
Disabled
Snap:
Report generator. . .
Sound:
Disabled
Sound:
Exit to dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Link current
Custom link. . .
Error report. . .

1/ 1
Link #1

Load Linker Configuration file


Linker name:

nEw

Rename

Accept

aDd

deLete

Cancel

or click to Select

If multiple configuration files exist (including the "current" application and any "custom" links) ONLY the LAST
CONFIGURATION to be "linked" can be transferred (only one set of .OBJ files can exist at a time).
BEFORE transferring a screen set, make certain that it was the last one linked (link again, if necessary).
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 38 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


3.1.4.2 Custom Link
This menu item is used to link a subset (one or more) of screens from within an
application. Once "Custom link" has been selected, the Load Linker Configuration
File dialog box appears. This file was created because of the introduction of
templates. A linker configuration file allows a user to generate different linked
applications using the same screen set. The files are similar to screen files. Linker
config filenames take the form of linkxxxx.cfg where xxxx represents 0001 to 9999
(just like screens). The file contains header information for storing the user
configuration name so that it can be brought up in a list box (just like screens).
The New button places the user in the Linker name field for editing the
configuration name. When the Accept key is activated, the program installs the
name into the header and creates the next linkxxxx.cfg file (the "Build Screen List"
dialog box then appears).
The Select button brings up a list box showing all of the linker configuration files.
After selecting a config file name from the list box, it is displayed in the Linker
name field.
The Rename button provides for re-editing of a configuration file name (the "Build
Screen List" dialog box then appears).
The deLete button removes the selected config file.
The Cancel button exits the function.
The Accept button closes this dialog box and opens the Build Screen Dialog box,
which contains all of the information from the last configuration (unless the
configuration is new).
3.1.4.3 Build Screen List
This menu item appears after a Linker Configuration File has been selected. Note
that the "Screens" and "Templates" buttons toggle. The "Screens" button is
depressed by default (and only screens can be added to the list). When the
"Templates" button is depressed, the "Screens" button is reset (and only
templates can be added). Note that custom link automatically discards unused
SOFTKEYS and unused ON SCREEN PATHS.
1/ 12

Build screen list


Screen name:

POWERUP

Screen count:

CR
ACCESS

Screen order:

MACHINE
MONITOR

Use templates:

(or V)
(or D)
(or R)
(or S)
(or A)

(or N)
(or L)
(or E)
(or T)
(or C)

(ALT-X)

SEQUENCE

preV

Next

aDd

deLete

all scReens

clEar

System
Monitor

Screens

Templates

Timeslot
Monitor

Accept

Cancel

SYSTEM
MESSAGE

To select an item press a button

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 39 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Previous
Either type "V" or position the pointer over the word "preV" and click the mouse.
"preV" moves the screen name list back one position (it wraps around). Once a
screen name appears, it can be removed from the list.
Add
Either type "D" or position the pointer over the word "aDd" and click the mouse.
"aDd" creates a new blank space at the end of the list. Once the space appears,
highlight a screen from the list on the right and press return (or double click).
All screens
Either type "R" or position the pointer over the words "all scReens" and click the
mouse. "all scREens" causes all of the screens (or all of the templates) appearing
in the list on the right to be included in the custom link list.
Screens
Either type "S" or position the pointer over the word "Screens" and click the mouse.
"Screens" causes a list of all available screens to appear. Individual screens can
then be added to the custom link list.
Accept
Either type "A" or position the pointer over the word "Accept" and click the mouse.
"Accept" tells the software that the custom link list is complete. A small window will
appear with the question "Save linker config data?" Press "Yes" to begin the linking
process. Press "No" to abort the linking process.
Next
Either type "N" or position the pointer over the word "Next" and click the mouse.
"Next" moves the screen name list forward one position (it wraps around). Once
a screen name is displayed, it can be deleted.
Delete
Either type "L" or position the pointer over the word "deLete" and click the mouse.
"deLete" removes the screen currently displayed in the screen name window from
the custom link list.
Clear
Either type "E" or position the pointer over the word "clEar" and click the mouse.
"clEar" causes all the screens currently included in the custom link list to be
removed from the list.
Templates
Either type "T" or position the pointer over the word "Templates" and click the
mouse. "Templates" causes a list of all available screen templates to appear (if any
have been created). Individual templates can then be added to the custom link list.
Note that in order for the selected templates to be included in the linking process
the "Use Templates" box must have an "X" entered.
Cancel
Either type "C" or position the pointer over the word "Cancel" and click the mouse.
"Cancel" aborts the custom link list process.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 40 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Toolbox

Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
none
Editor:
Select. . .
Char
set:
Char
set: Ascii
Utilities.
..
Char size: 8x16
Linker. . .
Snap:
Disabled
Snap:
Report generator. . .
Sound:
Disabled
Sound:
Exit to dos

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Link current
Custom link. . .
Error report. . .
LINKER ERROR REPORT

Application Name:

Test Screen Set 3

DOS File Name:

SCRN0001 .SRC
Powerup
Screen

Image Name:
Error Msg:
ID:

Data Handler setpoint unknown.


Controller number: 1
Card Number: 1

Ok

54-Modfile path/file for SP not found

114010A3

Error Number:

Inspect

Next error

pRev error

Cancel

(or Alt I)

(or Alt N)

(or Alt R)

(or Alt C)

3.1.4.4 Error Report


This menu item is used to view any errors that may have occurred during the linking
process. Once "Error report" has been selected, continue the selection process
until the application has been identified. Note that this window will appear
automatically after a link has been performed which contains errors. Note also that
the window will not appear unless an error exists.
The "Application Name" window contains the name of the chosen application. The
"DOS File Name" window contains the DOS file name of the screen on which the
currently displayed error occurred. DOS file names are assigned sequentially
within an application by the editor and are normally transparent to the user. If the
presently displayed error is system wide (like "no message text found"), the "DOS
File Name" window will be blank.
The "Image Name" window will contain the user assigned name of the screen on
which the currently displayed error occurred. Image names are the names
assigned and selected by the user during the editing process. Use the Screen
Editor to go to the screen named here in order to correct the displayed error.
The "Error Msg" window will contain a description of the displayed error. Use this
description to resolve the error. If the explanation of a specific error begins with the
word "WARNING," the occurrence of that error is not fatal. If the explanation of a
specific error begins with any other word, the occurrence of that error is fatal and
the .OBJ file associated with the error has not been generated. The error must be
corrected before linking can be completed. See the Appendixes for a list of the
Linker Error Messages.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 41 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


The "ID" window contains an identification code used by software developers jot
down this number if a persistent, "unsolvable" error occurs (refer to the Linker Error
Messages for a definition of this ID code).
The "Error Number" window will contain a sequential number identifying which
error in this particular error report is being displayed ("1" was the first error to occur
in the report, etc.).
Type "Alt I" or click on "Inspect" to display a small window with further information
about the displayed error (for instance, the error shown above was "created" by
purposely deleting the data handler modfile).
Type "Alt N" or click on "Next Error" to display the next error. Once the last error
is reached, the report will wrap around to the first error.
Type "Alt R" or click on "Prev Error" to display the previous error. Once the first error
is reached, the report will wrap around to the last error.
Type "Alt C" or click on "Cancel" to close the report. The program will return to the
menu.

Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Select. . .
Char set:
Utilities. . .
Char size:
Linker. . .
Snap:
Report generator. . .
Sound:
Exit to dos
Report Setup
Application

M4000 STANDARD USER

User

System

V3.1

EL 41aa

LaserJet IIP

LCD 41ax

MESSAGES:

SCREENS:

Printer

PRINT:

All Active

Graphic text

Machine function keys

Selected

ASCII only

Linker errors

Templates

Graphic

Math programs

Graphic only

keywords

Security

Data only

Sprites
Accept

Printer Setup

Cancel

To edit or select an item press

(or Alt A)

key

Data Base:

BC Database 1

Mfg:

Panasonic

Descript:

KX-P1180
Accept

(or Alt C)

Cancel

To edit or select an item press

CTRL C aborts printing

Printer List

Note that the "FX-85 Epson"


selection will be good for all
Epson printers.
1640-IN-006-0-02

key

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

LaserJet IIP Hewlett Packard


KX-P1180 Panasonic
FX-85 Epson
KX-P1080i Panasonic

Page 42 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


3.1.5 Report Generator
The Report Generator dialog box contains all of the printing options. This replaces
the previous print-one- choice-at-a-time menu driven concept. Now, multiple
choices can be printed with a single mouse click.
A blinking underscore indicates the current active field. To move the underscore
to another field, use the up/down arrow keys or single click with the mouse pointing
at the desired field.
To select an item, click the mouse in the box or use the enter key on the current
active field. A selected item contains an X in a box. Some boxes toggle between
choices such as User or System, EL or LCD, Graphic text or ASCII only, etc.
To "unselect" an item, click the mouse in the box or use the enter key on current
active field.
The application field is filled with the current application name. Choose User or
System and El or LCD before activating the application field. Activating the
application field brings up the Select an application for printing dialog box. The
application field will be filled with the Accepted application name.
Activating the Printer field brings up the Printer Setup dialog box. The chosen
Accepted printer is displayed in the printer field.
Simply X the items to be printed. Accept starts the printing process. Cancel
aborts the process.
Choose either All active, Template or Selected screens. If Selected is Xd, a
selection dialog box will appear after the Accept button is depressed. See Build
Screen Dialog. Screen graphics and data will be printed unless either Graphic
only or Data only is chosen.
Text messages and keywords can be printed in either graphic or ASCII form. If
ASCII is chosen, downloadable characters will be printed out as TAG names.
Sprites prints all sprites.
Machine function keys, linker errors, math programs and security data can also be
printed if desired.
Note that graphics processing for printer output can take several minutes - be
patient!

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 43 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Rel. X.X
Application

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Appl.:
editor Type. . .
Editor:
Select. . .
Char set:
Utilities. . .
Char size:
Linker. . .
Snap:
Report generator. . .
Sound:
Exit to dos

Note that ALL Editors must be closed


in order for this option to be available!

3.1.6 Exit to DOS


This menu item is used to end an editing session. Either type an "E" or position the
pointer over the words "Exit to dos" and click the mouse or use the arrow keys to
highlight "Exit to dos" and press return.
A small window with the question "End edit session?" will appear. Type "N" or click
on "No" to return to the main menu. Type "Y" or click on "Yes" to close the editor
package. Note that this selection is only available from the main menu. All editors
must be closed.
Before exiting, the program either creates or updates a configuration file
(OPTIGRAF.CFG) so that when the program is re-opened, it resumes as it was last
exited (i.e., the same editor type, application, printer, etc.).
Another option is to go to the DOS shell through the "Utilities" selection. The "dos
Shell" selection there allows the programmer access to DOS without ending the
editing session.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 44 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Appl.:
Character set. . .
Editor: none sOund. . .
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Ascii. . .
Japanese. . .
Korean. . .
Special. . .

EL Display
Ascii. . .

8x16
16x32

Japanese. . . 16x16
32x32

Korean. . .

16x16
32x32

Special. . .

16x16
32x32

Japanese. . . 16x16

Korean. . .

16x16

Special. . .

16x16

LCD Display
Ascii. . .

8x8

3.2 Toolbox
This menu item is used to select a character set or enable the sound function.
Select the toolbox menu by typing "T" (the highlighted letter) or positioning the
pointer over the top of the word "Toolbox" and pressing (and holding) the left
mouse button. The word "Toolbox" will highlight and the menu will extend
downward.
3.2.1 Character Set
Character set is used to select which of the four available sets will be used by the
editor.
Either type a "C" or position the pointer over the words "Character set" and release
the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Character set" and press
return. Four different choices will appear:
Ascii
Japanese
Korean
Special
Depending on the editor, each of the four character sets may have a small and
large version available.
3.2.1.1 ASCII
The electroluminescent (EL) display can use the entire ASCII character set (with
3 exceptions). The liquid crystal displays (LCDs) have a restricted character set
(see Characters Tab). Characters which appear on the keyboard can be typed in.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 45 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


For non-keyboard characters, refer to the list of ASCII characters in the character
sets Tab. The list shows all available characters as well as their decimal equivalent.
To use those characters that do not appear on the keyboard, hold down the "Alt"
key and type in the decimal equivalent of the character on the numeric keypad
(Num Lock must be ON). Once the code is typed, releasing the "Alt" key will cause
the character to appear.
The ASCII character set can be used for any text element (and MUST be used for
setpoints and values).
The 8x16 pixel version of ASCII divides the EL screen into 21 lines of 80 characters
each.
The 16x32 pixel version of ASCII divides the EL screen into 10 lines of 40
characters each.
The 8x8 pixel version of ASCII divides the LCD screen into 21 lines of 40 characters
each.
3.2.1.2 Japanese
The "Japanese" character set is a set consisting of approximately 1000 of the most
commonly used Japanese technical characters. Refer to the list of those characters in the character set Tab. The list shows the character as well as the JIS Code
for each character. To use a character, hold down the "Alt" key and type in the JIS
Code for that character (Do Not use the numeric keypad and Do note that the code
is case sensitive - use upper case letters - the Cap Lock key may not work on all
computers. If so, use the Shift key). Once the code is typed, release the "Alt" key
and the character appears.
The Japanese character set can be used for any text elements EXCEPT for
setpoints, values, module ASCII strings and a security setpoint).
The 16x16 pixel version of "Japanese" divides the EL screen into 21 lines of 40
characters each.
The 32x32 pixel version of "Japanese" divides the EL screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
The 16x16 pixel version of "Japanese" divides the LCD screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
3.2.1.3 Korean
The "Korean" character set is a set consisting of approximately 1000 of the most
commonly used Korean technical characters. Refer to the list of those characters
in the character set Tab. The list shows the character as well as an alpha-numeric
code for each character. To use a character, hold down the "Alt" key and type in
the code for that character (Do Not use the numeric keypad and Do note that the
code is case sensitive - use lower case letters). Once the code is typed, release
the "Alt" key and the character appears.
The Korean character set can be used for any text elements EXCEPT for setpoints,
values, module ASCII strings and a security setpoint).
The 16x16 pixel version of "Korean" divides the EL screen into 21 lines of 40
characters each.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 46 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


The 32x32 pixel version of "Korean" divides the EL screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
The 16x16 pixel version of "Korean" divides the LCD screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
3.2.1.4 Special
The "Special" character set initially contains only two "sample" characters. It is
provided in order to allow for a customized character set to be "built" using the
Barber-Colman Font Editor. This "special" character set can be made up of any
16x16 character (international symbols or icons?). Note that even though "Special" must be created as a16x16 pixel font, it can be assigned to EL screens as a
32x32 pixel font.
Refer to the MACO Font Editor (part number 71-752) for complete details about
creating a character set.
Make certain to create the file as a 16x16 pixel font.
Make certain to name the Font file "Special".
Print a copy of the file once it is complete.
Creating and saving the Font file will cause the Font Editor program to create two
files:
SPECIAL.BMP
SPECIAL.TBL
Both of these files must be copied into the directory containing the screen editor
(OPTIGRAF.EXE).
Once "Special.BMP" and Special.TBL" have been copied into the program, the
"Special" character set is used identically to the others. To use a character, hold
down the "Alt" key and type in the code for that character (Do Not use the numeric
keypad and Do note that the code is case sensitive - the Cap Lock key may not work
on all computers. If so, use the Shift key). Once the code is typed, release the "Alt"
key and the character appears.
The Special character set can be used for any text elements EXCEPT for setpoints,
values, module ASCII strings and a security setpoint).
The 16x16 pixel version of "Special" divides the EL screen into 21 lines of 40
characters each.
The 32x32 pixel version of "Special" divides the EL screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
The 16x16 pixel version of "Special" divides the LCD screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
3.2.2 Sound
This menu item is used to select whether the computer's beeper is enabled or
disabled. Either type an "O" or position the pointer over the word "Sound" and click
the mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Sound" and press return.
With sound enabled, the beeper beeps when a valid graphic text keystroke is
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 47 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


made. The only practical use for sound is to have it enabled while assigning
Japanese, Korean or Special characters to a screen (as the "Alt" key is released
a beep occurs for valid characters).
To enable sound when it is disabled, either type an "E" or position the pointer over
the word "Enable" and click the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight
enable and press return.
To disable sound when it is enabled, either type a "D" or position the pointer over
the word "Disable" and click the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight
"Disable" and press return.

Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Toolbox

Appl.:
Editor: none
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

HH:MM:SS AM

Help
About. . .
Help

C:\BCED\help\help1.txt
HELP-BASIC INFO
MAIN MENU
F1

Mouse & Keyboard Controls

F2

Forms

F3

List Boxes

F4

Information Boxes

Alt-F1

Menus/Icons

F5

Directory Box

Alt-F2

Forms

F6

Menus

Alt-F3

Buttons

F7

Icons

Alt-F4

List Boxes

F8

General Information

Alt-F5

Information Boxes

MOUSE & KEYBOARD CONTROLS

Press the "Home" key to return to the Help - Basic Info Main Menu.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 48 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


3.3 Help
This menu item is used for on-line help. Select the Help menu by typing "H" or
positioning the pointer over word "Help" and pressing (and holding) the left mouse
button. The word "Help" will highlight and the menu will extend downward.
3.3.1 About
This menu item shows the version and revision of the OptiGrafix screen editor.
Either type an "A" or position the pointer over the word "About" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "About" and press return. A small
window will appear containing pertinent data about the editor package.
3.3.2 Help
This menu item is used to bring up the on-line help window. Either type an "H" or
position the pointer over the word "Help" and release the mouse button or use the
arrow keys to highlight "Help" and press return. A large window titled "Help-Basic
Info Main Menu" will appear.
The Help window can be extended downward by grabbing the lower perimeter (as
shown above) and dragging downward.
"Help" contains a brief explanation of the different elements within the editor and
how to move around within them. Notice the menu selections immediately
following the window title. Pressing the corresponding function key (or Alt-F key)
will move the window to that position in the help file. The window can also be
advanced using the scroll bar or the arrow keys or page up/page down keys. To
exit Help completely, click the left mouse button while the pointer is on the
background.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 49 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 50 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Toolbox

Appl.: StandardScreen.
Screen. Set
.
Editor: none temPlate. . .
Char set: Ascii Messages. . .
Char size: 8x16maTh editor. . .
Snap: EnabledseCurity
Sound: Disabled
mach Function keys
saVe
save As
Quit w/o saving
Exit with saving

HH:MM:SS AM

Help
Existing
New
Rename
copy From. . .
reActivate
Deactivate
deLete

Note that the Editors menu selection does NOT


appear until an application has been selected!

3.4 Editors
The Editor menu is used to select or create individual files (screens, messages,
machine function keys, etc.) within a particular application. Select the editors menu
by typing "E" (the highlighted letter) or positioning the pointer over the top of the
word "Editors" and pressing (and holding) the left mouse button. The word "Editor"
will highlight and the menu will extend downward.
3.4.1 Screen
This menu item is used to enter the screen editing function. Either type an "S" or
position the pointer over the word "Screen" and release the mouse button or use
the arrow keys to highlight "Screen" and press return. A menu will appear
containing seven choices:
Existing
New
Rename
copy From
reActivate
Deactivate
deLete
3.4.1.1 Existing
Either type an "E" or position the pointer over the word "Existing" and click the
mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Existing" and press return. Two windows
will appear. The first will be titled "Select existing screen."
The second will contain a list of available screens.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button will scroll the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way and the middle of the
list will show in the window).
Or use the keypad to move through the list. Page Down moves the display down
one page; Page Up moves the display up one page; End moves the display to the
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 51 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


end of the list; Home moves the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys
move the highlighted area one position in the direction of the arrow.
Once a screen is highlighted, double click on the highlighted area or press return
(or single click anywhere outside of the screen list). The window containing the list
of screens will disappear and the highlighted screen name will appear in the
"Screen Name" window.
Once a screen name appears in the "Screen Name" window, either "Cancel", press
return or "Accept." Clicking on "Cancel" or typing "Alt C" will cause the program
to return to the main menu. Pressing return will cause the screen list to reappear.
Repeat the process to choose a different screen. Clicking on "Accept" or typing "Alt
A" will cause the chosen screen (along with the Screen Editor Menu) to be
displayed. Actual screen editing can begin.
3.4.1.2 New
Either type an "N" or position the pointer over the word "New" and click the mouse
or use the arrow keys to highlight "New" and press return.
The Screen Editor Menu (along with a blank screen) will appear. Actual screen
editing can begin.
(Screen naming and security level assignment are accomplished using the "saVe
as" feature.)
3.4.1.3 Rename

Note that BEFORE attempting to rename a screen file, make certain the
desired character set and size for the title has been selected in the Toolbox.
Either type an "R" or position the pointer over the word "Rename" and click the
mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Rename" and press return. Two windows
will appear. The first window will be titled "Rename screen file." The second
window will contain a list of the available screens. Continue with the selection
process until the title of the screen to be renamed appears in the "Screen name"
box.
If the character set or size of the highlighted screen name does not match the
current character set and size, the question "Use global character settings?" will
appear immediately on the screen. Typing "Y" or clicking on "Yes" will cause the
character set and size currently named in the upper left corner of the editor to be
used for renaming. Typing "N" or clicking on "No" will cause the character set and
size of the present screen name to also be used for the replacement name.
Once a screen name appears in the "Screen Name" window (or the global
character question is answered), a green underline cursor will also appear.
For ASCII character screen names, simply type in the character from the keyboard.
For non-keyboard ASCII characters, hold down the "Alt" key and type in the
decimal equivalent of the ASCII code USING THE KEYPAD (see character set Tab
for the code).
For Japanese, Korean or Special character names, hold down the "Alt" key and
type in the case sensitive Font ID using the keyboard and top row number keys
(NOT the keypad). Note that the Cap Lock key may not work on all computers. If
so, use the Shift key.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 52 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Once the replacement name is typed in, either "Cancel" or "Accept." Clicking on
"Cancel" or typing "Alt C" will cause the program to return to the menu. Clicking on
"Accept" or typing "Alt A" will cause the name now appearing in the "Rename
screen file" window to be assigned to the chosen screen. Pressing return will
cause the screen list to reappear. Repeat the previous process to choose a
different screen.
3.4.1.4 Copy From
This menu item is used to copy individual screens to this application. Either type
an "F" or position the pointer over the words "copy From" and click the mouse or
use the arrow keys to highlight "copy From" and press return. Continue the
selection process until the proper screen to copy has been identified.
Once a specific screen has been identified, it will be copied into the present
application. The program will respond with a message explaining what has
occurred.
3.4.1.5 Reactivate

Note that it is not necessary (or even possible) to Reactivate a screen unless
it has been previously Deactivated.
Either type an "A" or position the pointer over the word "reActivate" and click the
mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "reActivate" and press return.
Two windows will appear. The first will be titled "reActivate screen file." The second
will contain a list of the available screens. The only valid choices to reactivate will
be those screens which appear in the list as "<inactive>."
The purpose of Deactivating a screen is to keep the screen and its associated
data from being included in the linking process.
An inactive screen will NOT be linked. A screen which is not linked will NOT be
transferred.
Once an "inactive" screen is highlighted, double click on the highlighted area or
press return (or single click anywhere outside of the screen list).
The window containing the list of screens will disappear and the real name of the
highlighted screen will appear in the "reActivate screen file" window.
Once the screen name appears in the "reActivate screen file" window, either
"Cancel" or "Accept." Clicking on "Cancel" or typing "Alt C" will cause the program
to return to the menu. Clicking on "Accept" or typing "Alt A" will cause the name now
appearing in the "reActivate screen file" window to reappear in the screen file in its
former location.
3.4.1.6 Deactivate
Either type a "D" or position the pointer over the word "Deactivate" and click the
mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Deactivate" and press return.
Two windows will appear. The first will be titled "Deactivate screen file." The
second will contain a list of the available screens.
The purpose of Deactivating a screen is to keep the screen and its associated
data from being included in the linking process.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 53 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Toolbox

Help

Appl.: StandardScreen.
Screen. Set
.
Editor: none temPlate. . .
Char set: Ascii Messages. . .
Char size: 8x16maTh editor. . .
Snap: EnabledseCurity
Sound: Disabled
mach Function keys
saVe
save As
Quit w/o saving
Exit with saving

Rel. X.X
Application

HH:MM:SS AM

Existing
New
Rename
deLete
copy From. . .

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Template
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

Setpoint
Value

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc

Select save file


Screen name:

Security Level:
New

Present
Name
X

1
rEname

Template
Accept

Cancel

Edit the image name and press

3.4.2 Templates
The purpose of a template is to overlay screen data with the template data during
the link process. Once a template or templates have been created, call up Custom
Link (in the Build screen list), put an X in the Use templates field, push the
Template button and add the template screens. When the linker processes a
setpoint or a value, it loads in the template screen(s) and searches for that
particular setpoint or value. If found, the linker will use the templates data instead
of the screens data. This allows a user to build one screen set to be used on several
diversified applications. Templates can only be created in the USER mode (not the
SYSTEM mode).
There are two ways of creating a template file. The first is to run the Template editor
and select new. The other is to use an existing screen and Save as. A Template
field has also been added to "Save as." When in the screen editor, Xing the
template field, pressing the New button, and then the Accept button will save the
current screen as a template and switch the user to the template editor. The
process strips the screen of all elements and pathing except for setpoints, values,
and text.
The template editor has the same appearance as the screen editor except that only
setpoints, values and graphic text can be used. Setpoints and values can be placed
and edited. Graphic text is available for notes.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 54 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Appl.: StandardScreen.
Screen. Set
.
Editor: none Template. . .
Char set: Ascii Messages. . .
Text
Char size: 8x16maTh editor. . .
Keyword
MESSAGE. TMP
Snap: EnabledseCurity2/15
Sprite . .
This
is
a
sample
message
done
in 8x16 ASCII . They
Sound: Disabled
mach Function
keys
can have two
lines of 64-characters each.
saVe
save As
16x16 Japanese, Korean or Special can have two lines
Quit w/o
saving
of 32 characters each.
Exit with saving

16x32 ASCII can be 1 line of 32


32x32 Japanese, Korean or Special can have one line
of 16 characters.
====Sample centered "=" is padding character (1 line only)====

adD

ceNter

Blank

Undo

edIt

Copy

paSte

16x32 ASCII can be 1 line of 32


Character Sizes above are for EL Display.
LCDs can have 2 lines of 32 ASCII or
1 line of 16 Japanese, Korean or Special.

3.4.3 Messages

Note that there are two separate text message files - one for the User screen
set, the other for the System screen set. When editing messages for User
screens, make certain to do so from a User application. When editing
messages for System screens, make certain to do so from a System
application.
This menu item is used to select a message file. Messages are used by the
controller to inform the operator of changing conditions within the controller.
Messages can be assigned to a variety of control relay types, as well as to system
commands. In addition they can be assigned to "Module Displayable" functions
and "Module ASCII String" functions. A separate message can be assigned to
each "state" of the assigned function. When the "state" changes, the displayed
message will change.
There are three different types of message files associated with each application:
Text messages, which can be from 1 to 64 characters long; Keyword messages,
which can be from 1 to 32 characters long; and "Sprites" which are graphic
elements (created using the Sprite Editor) that can be used to display pictures or
to actually animate screens.
Either type an "M" or position the pointer over the word "Messages" and release
the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Messages" and press return.
A window will appear displaying two or three choices:
Text
Keyword
Sprite (not available on Version 3 LCDs)
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 55 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


3.4.3.1 Text Messages

Note that User Message Numbers 683 through 715 are reserved for the Math
function and must NOT be changed!
Either type a "T" or position the pointer over the word "Text" and click the mouse
or use the arrow keys to highlight "Text" and press return.
A window titled "MESSAGE .TMP" will overlay the screen. The window will contain
a complete list of the text messages.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button will scroll the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way and the middle of the
list will show in the window).
Or use the keypad to move through the list. Page Down moves the display down
one page; Page Up moves the display up one page; End moves the display to the
end of the list; Home moves the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys
move the highlighted area one position in the direction of the arrow.
Add
Either type "Alt D" or position the pointer over the word "Add" and click the mouse.
"Add" will create a new blank message at the end of the file. Once the highlighted
green blank appears, "Edit" or "Copy" and "Paste" can be used to insert text.
Center
Type "Alt N" or position the pointer over the word "Center" and click the mouse.
"Center" is used to center a single-line message within the message file. First use
"Edit" to insert the text (press Esc to escape the edit mode) and then use the
"Center" function.
Once "Center" has been selected a small window titled "Enter padding character"
will appear. Choose a character (or space) from whichever character set is being
used and type "Alt A" or click the mouse on "Accept." The message will be rewritten
on center with the "padding" character filling in the empty spaces at either end.
Blank
First make certain the message to be blanked is highlighted. Then type "Alt B" or
position the pointer over the word "Blank" and click the mouse. "Blank" is used to
remove the text from a message (the blank position will remain). A "Blank" can be
undone by an "Undo."
Undo
Type "Alt U" or position the pointer over the word "Undo" and click the mouse.
"Undo" is used to undo the effect of the last keystroke. Only "Center", "Blank" or
"Paste" can be undone. "Quit w/o saving" can be used if a mistake is noticed too
late to be corrected by "Undo." Remember that to "Quit w/o saving" will cause all
changes since the last "Save" to be lost.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 56 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Edit
Type "Alt I" or position the pointer over the word "Edit" and click the mouse. "Edit"
is used to type in new text or edit existing text.
Before entering the "Edit" function make certain the right character set and size are
selected. Any or all of the sets and sizes can be used in a message file (MESSAGE
.TMP), but only one set and size can be used within a specific message.
Once "Edit" is selected, a blinking cursor matching the character size will appear
in the highlighted message area. The keyboard arrow keys can be used to move
the cursor within the message area. Once the proper text is in the message, Press
Esc to escape the "Edit" function.
Copy
Type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word "Copy" and click the mouse.
"Copy" is used to save keystrokes when redoing identical or similar messages.
Once a message is copied a small window containing the copy will appear below
the text message editor buttons. The copied message can be pasted anywhere
within the message file as many times as necessary.
Paste
Type "Alt S" or position the pointer over the word "Paste" and click the mouse.
"Paste" is the complementary function of copy. Once a message is copied, either
"Paste" it over an existing message or "Add" a blank message and "Paste" it there.
System Message Changes
The following messages should be changed if updating to the A-13937-XX1 Data
Handler board (and Version 20.x4 or later data handler firmware and Version 3.02
or later operator station firmware):
#361
#362
#364
#366
#370

1640-IN-006-0-02

RTR Error (Data Handler)


Busy with RTR (Data Handler)
Balco Failure on Board (Note that this message applies to High Density
Temperature Boards only.)
System Powerup (Operator Station)
Comm Timeout (Operator Station)

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 57 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Toolbox

Screen. Set
Appl.: StandardScreen.
.
Editor: none Template. . .
Char set: Ascii Messages. . .
Char size: 8x16maTh editor. . .
Snap: EnabledseCurity
Sound: Disabled
mach Function keys

HH:MM:SS AM

Help
Text
Keyword
Sprite . .

saVe
save As
Quit w/o saving
Exit with saving

3/12

KEYWORD. TMP

single lines only


32 chars 8x16
16 chars 16x16

adD
inseRt
deLete
ceNter

KEYWORD
8 chars 32x32
++++Padding char is "+"++++

Blank
Undo
edIt
Copy

Character Sizes above are for EL Display.


LCDs can have 1 lines of 16 ASCII or
1 line of 8 Japanese, Korean or Special.

paSte

16 chars 16x32

3.4.3.2 Keyword Messages

Note that there are two separate keyword message files - one for the User
screen set, the other for the System screen set. When editing keyword
messages for User screens, make certain to do so from a User application.
When editing keyword messages for System screens, make certain to do so
from a System application.
Either type a "K" or position the pointer over the word "Keyword" and click the
mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Keyword" and press return. A window
titled "KEYWORD .TMP" will overlay the screen. The window will contain a
complete list of the keyword messages.
The Keyword File
Keyword files are separated into as many as ten separate sections determined by
the location of the word "KEYWORD" in the file.
Section 0 starts at the beginning of the file and continues until the word "KEYWORD" is encountered.
Section 1 starts at the end of Section 0 and continues until the word "KEYWORD"
is encountered again.
Section 2 starts at the end of Section 1 and continues until the word "KEYWORD"
is encountered again. And so on...
Section 0 could be in English.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 58 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Section 1 could be in Spanish.
Section 2 could be in German. And so on...
The file section shown on the screens is determined by a Display Processor
setpoint ("Keyword Setpoint").
A setpoint entry of "0" would cause English language keywords to appear.
A setpoint entry of "1" would cause Spanish language keywords to appear.
A setpoint entry of "2" would cause German language keywords to appear.
There is no "necessary" number of sections to the file (a maximum of ten).
To divide the KEYWORD .TMP file into sections, the word "KEYWORD" must be
typed into the file using all capital letters (using 8x16 ASCII for EL displays; 8x8
ASCII for LCDs).
There is no "necessary" length to the sections. Keywords to be used as graphic text
elements (that is, not assigned to a control function) may only reside in the first 256
positions of each section (0-255). Keywords to be used as message elements (that
is, assigned to a control function) may reside in any position within a section.

IMPORTANT: Maintain the same number of positions in each section of the file.
Words of like meaning MUST reside in the same relative position of each section
(if the English word for value is in Section 0, Position 5, then Section 1, Position
5 must contain the Spanish (or other language) word for value.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button will scroll the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way and the middle of the
list will show in the window).
Or use the keypad to move through the list. Page Down moves the display down
one page; Page Up moves the display up one page; End moves the display to the
end of the list; Home moves the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys
move the highlighted area one position in the direction of the arrow.
Add
Type "D" or position the pointer over the word "Add" and click the mouse. "Add" will
create a new blank keyword at the end of the keyword file. Once the highlighted
green blank appears, "Edit" or "Copy" and "Paste" can be used to insert text.
Insert
Type "R" or position the pointer over the word "Insert" and click the mouse. "Insert"
will create a new blank keyword above the selected line. Once the highlighted
green blank appears, "Edit" or "Copy" and "Paste" can be used to add text.

Be aware of possible pointer "problems" when modifying keyword text that


might be used in dynamic elements. Deletion or Insertion of a line in a text
file causes the pointer in the dynamic element to point to the wrong
message.
1640-IN-006-0-02

DeleteBarber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 59 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Toolbox

Screen. Set
Appl.: StandardScreen.
.
Editor: none Template. . .
Char set: Ascii Messages. . .
Char size: 8x16maTh editor. . .
Snap: EnabledseCurity
Sound: Disabled
mach Function keys

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Text
Keyword
Sprite . .

saVe
save As
Quit w/o saving
Exit with saving

Existing
New
Rename
copy From. . .
reActivate
Deactivate

Sprites are NOT available


for LCD Operator Stations

Refer to Section 3.4.1 "Screen" for


information on how to Select,
Rename, Create, etc.

3.4.3.3 Sprite

Note that there are two separate sprite files - one for the User screen set, the
other for the System screen set. When editing sprites for User screens, make
certain to do so from a User application. When editing sprites for System
screens, make certain to do so from a System application.
This menu item is used to select the sprite message file. Either type an "S" or
position the pointer over the word "Sprite" and click the mouse or use the arrow
keys to highlight "Sprite" and press return. A menu will appear containing six
choices:
Existing
New
Rename
copy From
reActivate
Deactivate
A sprite is simply a graphic message. Sprites are created, named, renamed, etc.,
EXACTLY like a screen EXCEPT that there are NO DYNAMIC ELEMENTS
(setpoints, control relays, text or keyword messages, etc.) in the sprite.
Sprites may consist of any or all of the graphic elements (lines, circles, rectangles,
text, etc.).
Refer to Section 3.4.1 "Screen" for information on how to select, rename, etc.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 60 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Application

Toolbox

Screen. Set
Appl.: StandardScreen.
.
Editor: none Template. . .
Char set: Ascii Messages. . .
Char size: 8x16maTh editor. . .
Snap: EnabledseCurity
Sound: Disabled
mach Function keys
saVe
save As
Quit w/o saving
Exit with saving

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Master
Slave 2
sLave 3
slAve 4
copy From. . .

Note that the appendixes contain math function screen examples.


READ this entire section CAREFULLY before editing!

3.4.4 Math Editor


The math option is available on certain MACO controllers. It performs basic
calculator functions (addition, subtraction, multiplication and division), as well as
comparison tests (greater than, less than, equal to, not equal to). These functions
can be used to calculate parameters for display, or to modify setpoints in the
system based on other values or setpoints. There are also several associated
control relays which can be used in the RLD program to perform various alarm
functions. Equations are programmed using the math editor and can be made
transparent to the end user.

IMPORTANT: In order for the math editor functions to work, the math option must
have been purchased for the controller.
Either type a "T" or position the pointer over the words "maTh editor" and release
the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "maTh editor" and press return.
A window will appear displaying five choices:
Master
Slave 2
sLave 3
slAve 4
copy From...
3.4.4.1 About Math Functions
Each Data Handler board in a system provides up to sixteen math functions
(equations). The only limit on math function size is that the total of all math functions
(up to 16) cannot exceed 688 lines (1007 beginning with Version 20.x6 data
handler firmware; contact B-C if attempting to update an existing system). On
powerup, the system tests for the presence of all the setpoints used in the math
functions. The system also tests for the presence of a board (temperature,
hydraulic, etc.) if a math command uses a setpoint, value or control relay from that
board. If an error is found, that math function will never run (the math error CR for
that function will be turned on).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 61 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


2/20
3/20

MASTER. TMP

Scan Time

Jump ON

TEMPORARY CR 100

MTC ON

MTC OFF Copy SP

Spare SP #1

Process SP No. 1 Zone 2

Copy SP

Spare SP #2

Process SP No. 1 Zone 3

Copy SP

Spare SP #3

Process SP No. 1 Zone 4


DONE

Jump
MTC ON

Load ID

Process SP No. 1 Zone 1

Subtract ID

Process Temp. Zone 1

Multiply ID

~Spare Setpnt #97 (+/-)

Store Reg

Math Register #1

End Function

DONE
edIt

inSert

deLete

adD

Make

View

Error:
Next

preV

Cancel

The math functions work by use of a 32 bit accumulator. The accumulator is first
loaded with a setpoint, value or constant. Other parameters can then be read and
an operation performed on the accumulator. The result can be further manipulated
or written to the system (as a change to a setpoint or value on the screens).
A function executes in a linear fashion until the end of that function is encountered.
If an error is detected, the function will stop at that point and the remainder will not
be executed. There is no looping in a function, but tests can be performed to skip
lines (jump). The system typically will execute approximately 100 math instructions
per second.
The rate at which these functions are performed is programmable. They can be
time-based or triggered on the occurence of some event. All time-based triggers
(up to sixteen) are evaluated every 100 milliseconds. Event-based triggers (for
example, a setpoint change or CR transition) are evaluated one every 10
milliseconds. Once a math function starts, it runs to completion. Any other math
function will not start until the one in process is completed. Several functions can
be simultaneously triggered, but they will wait their turn to run. Math Function #1
has a higher run priority than other functions. If several math functions are triggered
simultaneously, Math Function #1 will start ahead of the rest. Math Function #1 will
always run first if it is triggered UNLESS it has just completed running. Otherwise,
all math functions run in ascending numeric order.
Math functions in the master system can access or modify any parameter in the
master or slave systems.
Math functions in a slave system can only access or modify parameters in that
slave system.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 62 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Several "Spare Setpoints" are provided in the Data Handler for use either with SPC
or as math function parameters (there are 96 unipolar setpoints and 32 bipolar
setpoints). If more setpoints are required for a particular application, unused
setpoints from other modfiles can be used as long as their field size is correct.
There is no requirement that these setpoints be used in the screen set ("Linker" will
include any setpoints or values found in the math functions but which are not found
elsewhere in the screen set).
Each Data Handler also provides sixty-four general purpose registers (Values) for
storage of intermediate calculation results. These intermediate registers can be
programmed onto screens for use in debugging a math function, but there is no
requirement that they be included in the screen set. These registers are setup as
floating values. They are 32 bits long for calculations, but display only the lower 16
bits. They will display as positive (no sign) or negative, depending on the results
of the calculation. When programming these values onto a screen, use a field size

Instructions

Rack No.

Card No.

Descriptors

Labels

Comments

"Jump to" Labels

master.prt

MTCOFF

Scan Time
Jump ON
Copy SP
Copy SP
Copy SP
Copy SP
Copy SP
Copy SP
Copy SP

MTC ON

DONE

Jump
Load ID
Subtract ID
Multiply ID
Store Reg
Load ID
Multiply ID
Divide Const
Add ID
Store SP
Load ID
Multiply ID
Divide Const
Add ID
Store SP
Load ID
Multiply ID
Divide Const
Add ID
Store SP
Load ID
Multiply ID
Divide Const
Add ID
Store SP
Load ID
Multiply ID
Divide Const
Add ID
Store SP
Load ID
Multiply ID
Divide Const
Add ID
Store SP
Load ID
Multiply ID
Divide Const
Add ID
Store SP
End Function

Melt Temperature Control


5.0
R1 C1
TEMPORARY CR 180
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #1
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 2
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #2
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 3
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #3
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 4
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #4
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 5
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #5
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 6
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #6
R1 C2
Process SP No. 1 Zone 1
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #7
R1 C2
Process SP No. 1 Zone 2
R0 C0
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 1
R1 C1
Process Temp. Zone 1
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #97 (+/-)
R1 C1
Math Register #1
R1 C1
Math Register #1
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #98 (+/-)
100
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #1
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 2
R1 C1
Math Register #1
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #99 (+/-)
100
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #2
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 3
R1 C1
Math Register #1
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #100 (+/-)
100
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #3
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 4
R1 C1
Math Register #1
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #101 (+/-)
100
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #4
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 5
R1 C1
Math Register #1
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #102 (+/-)
100
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #5
R1 C1
Process SP No. 1 Zone 6
R1 C1
Math Register #1
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #103 (+/-)
100
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #6
R1 C2
Process SP No. 1 Zone 1
R1 C1
Math Register #1
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #104 (+/-)
100
R1 C1
~Spare Setpnt #7
R1 C2
Process SP No. 1 Zone 2

MTC ON Test if MTC enabled

DONE
Calc MTC Modifier
* Master Gain
Save Master deviation
Calc for Zone 2
* % Effect

Calc for Zone 3


* % Effect

Calc for Zone 4


* % Effect

Calc for Zone 5


* % Effect

Calc for Zone 6


* % Effect

Calc for Zone 7


* % Effect

Calc for Zone 8


* % Effect

Math Function File Printout


1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 63 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

FOR PROGRAMMING:
Setpoints, Values & Control Relays
throughout the System
Spare Uni-polar Math/SPC Setpoints
(Data Handler)
~Spare Setpnt #1
through
~Spare Setpnt #96
Spare Bi-polar Math/SPC Setpoints
(Data Handler)
~Spare Setpnt #97 (+/-)
through
~Spare Setpnt #128 (+/-)

Control Relays
(Data Handler)
825 Math Function Error #1
826 Math Function Error #2
827 Math Function Error #3
828 Math Function Error #4
829 Math Function Error #5
830 Math Function Error #6
831 Math Function Error #7
832 Math Function Error #8
833 Math Function Error #9
834 Math Function Error #10
835 Math Function Error #11
836 Math Function Error #12
837 Math Function Error #13
838 Math Function Error #14
839 Math Function Error #15
840 Math Function Error #16

Control Relays
(Data Handler)
841 ~Math Output CR #1
842 ~Math Output CR #2
843 ~Math Output CR #3
844 ~Math Output CR #4
845 ~Math Output CR #5
846 ~Math Output CR #6
847 ~Math Output CR #7
848 ~Math Output CR #8
849 ~Math Output CR #9
850 ~Math Output CR #10
851 ~Math Output CR #11
852 ~Math Output CR #12
853 ~Math Output CR #13
854 ~Math Output CR #14
855 ~Math Output CR #15
856 ~Math Output CR #16

Math Function Registers (Values)


(Data Handler)
Math Register #1
through
Math Register #64
For screen programming, program a "spare setpoint" to the screen in place of the
"normal setpoint," then perform the math function by starting with the "spare setpoint,"
performing some operation on it, and then storing it to the "normal setpoint."

FOR TROUBLESHOOTING:
Math Buffer Values (Data Handler)
Math Buffer, Line #1
through
Math Buffer, Line #20
Math Buffer Module ASCII Strings (Data Handler)
Math Buffer, ID #1
through
Math Buffer, ID #20
Math Buffer Mod. Displayable Msgs. (Data Handler)
Math Buffer, Cmd #1
through
Math Buffer, Cmd #20
Math Buffer System Commands (Data Handler)
Math Buffer - Prev Funct
Math Buffer - Next Funct
Math Buffer - Prev Line
Math Buffer - Next Line
Math Buffer - Clear Data

1640-IN-006-0-02

Control Relays
(Data Handler)
825
Math Function Error #1
826
Math Function Error #2
827
Math Function Error #3
828
Math Function Error #4
829
Math Function Error #5
830
Math Function Error #6
831
Math Function Error #7
832
Math Function Error #8
833
Math Function Error #9
834
Math Function Error #10
835
Math Function Error #11
836
Math Function Error #12
837
Math Function Error #13
838
Math Function Error #14
839
Math Function Error #15
840
Math Function Error #16

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 64 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Scan Time Instruction
Instruction:

Absolute Val
Add ID
Add Const
Copy SP

Time Base (sec): 5.3


Label:
Comment:

Melt Temperature Control

Accept

Cancel

Scan Instruction
Instruction:
Descriptor:

INSTRUCTION

Scan CR On
TEMPORARY CR 100

Label: CR#100
Comment:

Melt Temp Control Enable

Accept

Scan CR On
Scan CR Fall
Scan CR Rise
Scan SP
Turn CR On
Turn CR Off

Cancel

Accumulator Instruction

Descriptor:

INSTRUCTION

Load ID

Instruction:

Process SP No. 1 Zone 1

Label: MTC ON
Comment:

Calc MTC Modifier

Accept

Cancel

Add ID
Divide ID
Load ID
Multiply ID
Store Reg
Store SP
Subtract ID

INSTRUCTION
Add Const
Divide Const
Load Const
Mult Const
Subtr Const

Constant: 212.7
Label:
Comment:

Offset

Accept

Cancel

Jump

Jump to Label:

DONE

INSTRUCTION

Descriptor:
Label:
Comment:
Accept

Cancel

Jump
Jump EQU
Jump GT
Jump GTE
Jump LT
Jump LTE
Jump NEQU
Jump OFF
JumP ON

Copy Setpoint Instruction


Instruction:

Copy SP

Spare Descriptor: ~Spare Setpnt #1


Descriptor: Process SP No. 1 Zone 1
Label: MTCOFF
Comment:

Offset
Accept

Jump GT
Jump GTE

Jump LTE
Jump NEQU
Jump OFF

Jump Instruction
Instruction:

Divide ID
Divide Const
End Function
Jump
Jump EQU

Jump LT

Constant Instruction
Add Const

Instruction:

Jump ON
Load ID
Load Const
Multiply ID
Mult Const
Negate
Scan Time
Scan CR On
Scan CR Fall

Cancel

Scan CR Rise
Abs-Neg-End Instruction
Instruction:

INSTRUCTION

End Function

End Function
Absolute Val
Negate

Label:
Comment:

Accept

Cancel

Description

Instruction

Scan Time

Scan SP
Store Reg
Store SP
Subtract ID
Subtr Const
Turn CR Off
Turn CR On

Take the absolute value of the accumulator


Add ID (in "Descriptor") to accumulator
Add constant (in "Constant") to accumulator
Copy spare setpoint (in "Spare Descriptor") to
setpoint ID (in "Descriptor")
Divide the accumulator by the ID (in "Descriptor")
Divide the accumulator by the constant (in "Constant")
End this function
Jump to the line labeled with the "Jump to" label
Jump to the "Jump to" label if the accumulator equals
the ID (in "Descriptor")
Jump to the "Jump to" label if the accumulator is greater
than the ID (in "Descriptor")
Jump to the "Jump to" label if the accumulator is greater
than or equal to the ID (in "Descriptor")
Jump to the "Jump to" label if the accumulator is less
than the ID (in "Descriptor")
Jump to the "Jump to" label if the accumulator is less
than or equal to the ID (in "Descriptor")
Jump to the "Jump to" label if the accumulator is not equal
to the ID (in "Descriptor")
Jump to the "Jump to" label if the control relay ID
(in "Descriptor") is OFF
Jump to the "Jump to" label if the control relay ID
(in "Descriptor") is ON
Load ID (in "Descriptor") into accumulator
Load constant (in "Constant") into accumulator
Multiply accumulator by ID (in "Descriptor")
Multiply accumulator by constant (in "Constant")
Take the negative of the accumulator
Start this function every (seconds, in 0.1 second increments)
Start this function if control relay ID (in "Descriptor") is ON
Start this function on the falling edge of the control relay ID
(in "Descriptor")
Start this function on the rising edge of the control relay ID
(in "Descriptor")
Start this function if the setpoint (in "Descriptor") is changed
Store the accumulator in register ID (in "Descriptor")
Store the accumulator in setpoint ID (in "Descriptor")
Subtract the ID (in "Descriptor") from the accumulator
Subtract the constant (in "Constant") from the accumulator
Turn control relay ID (in "Descriptor") OFF
Turn control relay ID (in "Descriptor") ON

The Table to the right shows an alphabetic listing of all instructions. The windows to the left show the different window
formats. The small window (if there is one) shows all of the instructions that share that particular format.
Note that there is no direct means of loading a constant greater than 65535 (or beyond -32768 to 32767 for bipolar
constants), but it can be accomplished by multiplying two constants together.
Note also that there is no instruction to compare the accumulator with a constant (but it can be accomplished by loading
the constant into a register and then comparing the accumulator to that register).
Note also that ALL labels MUST be 6 characters long (use the space bar to create blank spaces).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 65 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

Byte 2
Byte 1

VIEW MATH FUNCTIONS

This indicates that


an error has
occurred in Math
Function #1 (Control
Relay 825 is set).

LINE#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Math Function Errors
17
18
1 - - - - - - 19

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Byte 4
Byte 3

COMMAND
1
SCAN TIME
0
Load ID
Mult Const
0
Div ID
0
0
Div ID
Store Reg
0
End Function 0
SCAN TIME
2
8
Jump On
Copy SP
1
Copy SP
2
Copy SP
3
4
Copy SP
5
Copy SP
Copy SP
6
7
Copy SP
39
Jump
0
Load ID
Subtr ID
0
Mult ID
0

0
17
0
17
17
17
0
0
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
0
17
17
17

ID
0
3
4
64
64
64
0
0
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
2
2
64

Byte 5&6

2
131
1304
4472
4472
33026
0
30
9020
4609
4865
5121
5377
5633
4353
4609
0
4353
50
4576

This indicates either


that an error has
occurred or that the
math function has
encountered a
setpoint or value
which is not
included on any
screens.

VALUE
1
0
1304
0

8
75
75
75
75
75
75
75

A minus sign (-) is


used to indicate a
CR which is OFF.
An asterisk (*) is
used to indicate a
CR which is ON.

These text messages must be present in


the User text file at locations 683 - 723.

Note that this screen is included with OptiGrafix but is inactive.

Byte Definitions based on Instruction Format:

INSTRUCTION INSTRUCTION
Jump
Jump EQU
Jump GT
Jump GTE
Jump LT
Jump LTE
Jump NEQU
Jump OFF
JumP ON

INSTRUCTION
Add Const
Divide Const
Load Const
Mult Const
Subtr Const

1640-IN-006-0-02

Add ID
Divide ID
Load ID
Multiply ID
Store Reg
Store SP
Subtract ID

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5

=
=
=
=
=

Instruction
Math Function No.
ID Address
ID Function
ID Type Request/
Parameter No.
B6 = Parameter No.

INSTRUCTION
Scan Time

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

=
=
=
=
=
=

Instruction
Math Function No.
00
00
Scan Time MSB
Scan Time LSB

B1 = Instruction

INSTRUCTION B2 = Spare SP No.


B3 = ID Address
Copy SP
B4 = ID Function
B5 = ID Type Request/
Parameter No.
B6 = Parameter No.

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

=
=
=
=
=
=

Instruction
00
00
Const # Dec Places/Field Size
Const MSB
Const LSB

B1 =
=
=
=
=

INSTRUCTION B2
B3
Scan CR On
B4
Scan CR Fall
Scan CR Rise B5
Scan SP
B6
Turn CR On
Turn CR Off

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Instruction
Math Function No.
ID Address
ID Function
ID Type Request/
Parameter No.
= Parameter No.

Page 66 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


of 3 integer and 2 decimal digits in order to reserve enough space on the screen
to prevent overlap with other parameters.
3.4.4.2 Copy From

Note that both the "Target" and "Source" must BOTH have a valid modfile
path established BEFORE attempting to Copy From.
This menu item is used to duplicate all of the math function files (Master, Slave 2,
Slave 3 and Slave 4) from another application. Either type an "F" or position the
pointer over the words "copy From" and click the mouse or use the arrow keys to
highlight "copy From" and press return. Continue the selection process until the
application to copy the files from is identified.
Once a specific application has been identified, the program will copy the files from
the application into the current (open) application where they can be edited if
necessary. If one or more math function files already exist in the current application, a window will appear asking whether those files should be overwritten.
3.4.4.3 Using the Math Editor

Note that the Math Editor works in exactly the same fashion whether Master or
Slave functions are being programmed. This explanation will be from the point of
view of a Master function.
Either type an "M" or position the pointer over the word "Master" and click the
mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Master" and press return. A window titled
"MASTER .TMP" will overlay the screen. The window will contain any existing
master math functions. Each math function must begin with a "Scan" command
and end with an "End Function" command. The "Scan" command tells the math
function "start when this happens. . ." and the "End Function" command tells the
math function "stop here."
Edit

IMPORTANT:
Before attempting to edit a math function, Make a BACKUP copy of the entire
application. Although all known problems are explained in this section, the
files contained in any application represent many hours of work and it is best
to play it safe.
IMPORTANT: A valid modfile path MUST be established BEFORE attempting to
edit a math function file. Attempting to edit a file before a modfile path is selected
will cause the program to "lock-up" and prompt the error message "ERROR:
Modfile Path Not Found."
Type "I" or position the pointer over the word "Edit" and click the mouse. "Edit" is
used to define a new line in a function or edit an existing line in a function.
Before "Edit" can be selected, a position within the file must be highlighted (either
click on an existing position or use "Add" or "Insert"). For new lines (just "Added"
or "Inserted"), once "Edit" is selected, an alphabatized list of all instructions will
appear. Once an instruction is chosen from the list (highlight and double click or
press return), a window compatible with the format of the instruction will appear.
Fill in the blanks in the window in order to complete the definition of that particular
line. The comment field is optional and does not have to be used. The label field
only needs to be used if the program is going to "jump" to that particular line.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 67 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


For existing lines, the existing window will appear. Only those instructions with a
compatible data format will be available for editing. If it is necessary to edit to an
instruction which does not appear, it will be necessary to first "Delete" the existing
instruction and "Add" or "Insert" a new instruction.
Insert
Type "S" or position the pointer over the word "Insert" and click the mouse. "Insert"
is used to insert a new instruction line between two existing lines. First click on an
existing line, then select "Insert." The highlighted line (and all after it) will move
down one file position. A new (blank) line will remain behind in the original position,
highlighted and ready for editing.
Delete
Type "L" or position the pointer over the word "Delete" and click the mouse.
"Delete" is used to delete an existing instruction line. First click on the line, then
select "Delete." The highlighted line will be removed and all lines following it will
move up one file position.
Add
Type "D" or position the pointer over the word "Add" and click the mouse. "Add" is
used to add a new instruction line to the end of the file. Once "Add" has been
selected a new (blank) line will appear at the end of the file, highlighted and ready
for editing.
Make
Type "M" or position the pointer over the word "Make" and click the mouse. "Make"
is used to compile the math function file. Once editing is complete, click on "Make"
and the program will attempt to create the files needed for transferring and printing.
Note that printing is possible regardless of the results of the "make," but a "make"
must be attempted before printing can occur.
If no errors are encountered, a small window stating so will appear once the files
have been compiled. If errors are encountered during the process, an error window
will appear at the bottom of the screen. The errors must be corrected before the
file will compile. Use "Next" and "Prev" to cycle through the errors. Follow the
prompts appearing in the Error window to make corrections. "Cancel" will close the
Error window. Once all of the errors have been corrected, the file will compile and
a window with the statement "No Errors" will appear.

IMPORTANT: After "Making" the math file, you must Save the file either by
performing a "Save" or "Exit with Saving" (both under "Editor").
IMPORTANT: After math functions have been compiled (a "make" performed) with
no errors, the application must be "Linked" (under "Application") before screens
can be downloaded to the controller.
View
Type "V" or position the pointer over the word "View" and click the mouse. "View"
is used to examine the file in a format more closely approximating that in which it
will print from the Report Generator. "View" is only available after "Make" has been
performed without errors. Once view is selected, a large window will overlay the

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 68 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


editor. Note that more information appears in the "View" version of the file than
does in the "Editor" version (comments, Rack & Card numbers).
Use the Page Up, Page Down, Up arrow or Down arrow keys to move through the
file. Position the pointer on the top or bottom border of the window and press and
hold the left mouse button. The window will expand or contract as the pointer is
moved. Click on view a second time (or click on an area outside of the "View"
window) to close the "View" window.
Modifying a V3.0 Math Function
When modifying a line in a math function created using the OptiGrafix Version 3.0,
a "Corrupted System" message can occur or a setpoint form may come up blank.
If either situation occurs, "delete" the line, perform an "insert" and re-enter the data.

IMPORTANT:
Do NOT modify a Module Type in this situation. Modifying a Module Type
could corrupt the ENTIRE Math File!

Limits for "Load Constant" and "Scan Time"


OptiGrafix does not restrict either "Load Constant" or "Scan Time" entries to any
valid range. The limits for a constant are either 0 to 65535 or -32768 to 32767. The
limits for a scan time are 0.1 to 6553.5 (seconds), in 0.1 increments.
Field Sizes
The field size and polarity of the math accumulator are set by the data that is stored
to them. The polarity of the accumulator will change as the result of an operation.
Field size DOES NOT change when an operation is performed. Math functions
must take into account that the decimal point does not move during multiply or
divide operations.
The math registers are displayed as floating point values, meaning that their field
size and polarity are determined by the Data Handler. The OptiGrafix editor cannot
be used to change the field size or polarity. When programming these floating
setpoints or values (for math or SPC), there should be 7 character locations
reserved on the screen for displaying the number. If the field size of a number must
be changed, do this: Once the number is in a math register, do a "Store SP" to a
Spare Setpoint (which is configured with the correct field sizes), then do a "Load
ID" to load that spare setpoint (and pick-up the desired field size).
Running the Math Function in Real Time

NOT Required with Version 20.x6


Beginning with Data Handler firmware Version 20.x6, these precautions are no
longer necessary! (With V20.x6 or later, the powerup setpoints and internal recipes
are saved in the non-volatile RAM on the Data Handler because of this,"save
setpoint" operations occur faster; the operator station is able to continue to update
the screen while a "save setpoint" or "recipe transfer" operation is in process; and
math functions continue to run during a "save setpoint" or "recipe transfer.")

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 69 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Because EEPROM cannot be read from and written to at the same time, the math
function will pause when certain commands are initiated. The Setpoint Save,
INSTA-SET Save, INSTA-SET Read, and Recipe Transfer commands will interrupt the math function. After these commands have been completed, the math
function will resume.
If math is being used to calculate non-critical process cycle values, this condition
should be of no concern. If the operation requires that the math function must run
continuously e.g., math set CRs used by RLD, or math calculated setpoints used
for machine motion and functionality then disable the INSTA-SET save, read and
delete functions to avoid the conflict.
When "Inhibit Local Recipe Save" (CR 645) is energized, the INSTA-SET Save
function is disabled. With this CR on, the commands that cannot be used are:
Recipe Transfer from Active to Internal
INSTA-SET Save
Save Setpoints
When "Inhibit Local Recipe Read" (CR 646) is energized, the INSTA-SET Read
function is disabled. With this CR on, the commands that cannot be used are:
Recipe Transfer from Internal to Active
INSTA-SET Read
Restore Setpoints
(Although "Restore Setpoints" does not pause the math function, it will be disabled
when CR 646 is energized.)
When "Inhibit Local Recipe Delete" (CR 647) is energized, the Delete Recipe
function is disabled.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 70 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Toolbox

Appl.: StandardScreen.
Screen. Set
.
Editor: none Template. . .
Char set: Ascii Messages. . .
Char size: 8x16maTh editor. . .
Snap: EnabledseCurity
Sound: Disabled
mach Function keys
saVe
save As
Quit w/o saving
If your Security Exit with saving
Level is:

You can:

equal to

View only

greater than

Change

less than

Not View
(items do not appear)

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

2/3

LEVEL 1. TMP
adD

level 1
level 2
level 3

347-46-2359
123456789012
325

deLete
Blank
Undo

level 4

edIt

level 5

Copy
paSte

Default Codes (don't tell anyone),


MACO 5000 EL User Screens V3.02:
Level 1: 1
Level 2: 2
Level 3: 3
Level 4: 4
Level 5: 5

325
Default Codes
All other System & User Screens:
Level 1: 1
Level 2: 1235
Level 3: 9875
Level 4: 1397
Level 5: 877-0241

3.4.5 Security
Either type a "C" or position the pointer over the word "Security" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Security" and press return. A
window titled "LEVEL 1 .TMP" will overlay the screen. The window will contain a
complete list of the security codes for Level 1.
The Security Code File
The controller has the capability of operating at five different user security levels.
Each of these five levels of security can have a multiple number of security codes.
Operating at Level 1 allows the least access. Operating at Level 5 allows the most
access. Higher numbered levels can access lower numbered levels. The security
level of control functions is determined at the time the function is placed on a
screen. The security level of a screen is determined at the time the screen is saved.
The codes for each level appear separately depending on which level is selected
using the buttons (level 1 through level 5) along the left side of the security editor.
Level 1 appears when the security editor is first opened.
Security codes can be up to 12 digits in length and may consist of the numbers zero
through nine, as well as dashes (the minus sign). Make at least one entry for each
security level. If not, AT LEAST be certain to make an entry for Level 5.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT leave a "blank code" in the file. A blank security code allows
the Enter key to act as a valid password!
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 71 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Once all the codes for all the levels are keyed in, examine and RECORD the codes.
It is a good practice to keep at least two separate copies of the codes and to make
certain one of those copies is available at all times.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button will scroll the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way and the middle of the
list will show in the window).
Or use the keypad to move through the list. Page Down moves the display down
one page; Page Up moves the display up one page; End moves the display to the
end of the list; Home moves the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys
move the highlighted area one position in the direction of the arrow.
Level Selection
The security editor window will appear with the Level 1 codes displayed. To change
levels, either type the number of the desired level (1 - 5) or position the pointer over
the button of the desired level and click the mouse.
Add
Either type "D" or position the pointer over the word "Add" and click the mouse.
"Add" will create a new blank security code at the end of the security code file. Once
the highlighted green blank appears, "Edit" or "Copy" and "Paste" can be used to
insert a code.

DO NOT exit and save a blank entry. Doing so makes the "Enter" key a valid
security code for that level!
Delete
First make certain the code to be deleted is highlighted. Then type "L" or position
the pointer over the word "Delete" and click the mouse. "Delete" will remove the
code as well as the position from the file (to avoid leaving blank codes within a file).
Note that it is not possible to delete ALL codes within a level. The last remaining
code of a level will not delete.
Blank
First make certain the code to be blanked is highlighted. Then type "B" or position
the pointer over the word "Blank" and click the mouse. "Blank" is used to remove
the code from a position (the blank position will remain). A "Blank" can be undone
by an "Undo."
Undo
Type "U" or position the pointer over the word "Undo" and click the mouse. "Undo"
is used to undo the effect of the last keystroke. Only "Delete", "Blank" or "Paste"
can be undone. "Quit w/o saving" can be used if a mistake is noticed too late to be
corrected by "Undo." Remember that to "Quit w/o saving" will cause all changes
since the last "Save" to be lost.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 72 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Edit
Type "I" or position the pointer over the word "Edit" and click the mouse. "Edit" is
used type in a new code or edit an existing code. The character set will
automatically default to 8x16 ASCII for all security code entries. No other font
choices are available.
Once "Edit" is selected, a blinking cursor matching the character size will appear
in the highlighted area. The keyboard arrow keys can be used to move the cursor
within the code area. Once the proper code is entered, Press Esc to escape the
"Edit" function.
Copy
Type "C" or position the pointer over the word "Copy" and click the mouse. "Copy"
is used to save keystrokes when redoing identical or similar codes.
Once a code is copied a small window containing the copy will appear below the
code list. The copied code can be pasted anywhere within the security code file
(even at different levels) as many times as necessary.
Paste
Type "S" or position the pointer over the word "Paste" and click the mouse. "Paste"
is the complementary function of copy. Once a code is copied, either "Paste" it over
an existing code (even at different levels) or "Add" a blank code (different levels
also) and "Paste" it there.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 73 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 74 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS AM

Help

Appl.: StandardScreen.
Screen. Set
.
Editor: none Template. . .
Char set: Ascii Messages. . .
Char size: 8x16maTh editor. . .
Snap: EnabledseCurity
Sound: Disabled
mach Function keys
saVe
save As
Quit w/o saving
Exit with saving

MACHINE FUNCTION KEYS


CR Type
Operator CR
Module Type
Data Handler

17

18 10

19 11

20 12

21 13

22 14

23 15

24 16

Description
Operator CR 1657

Barber-Colman
Controller Num

Card Number

Switch Action
ON
1

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Security Level
Accept

Cancel

cLear

Model 41AV has its Machine


Function Keys rotated 90 degrees
as shown above. Note the numbering scheme.
Refer to the Appendixes for as shipped definitions.
If changes are made, record the changes!
3.4.6 Machine Function Keys
Either type an "F" or position the pointer over the words "mach Function keys" and
release the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "mach Function keys"
and press return. A graphic of a MACO operator station will appear. Use the mouse
(click once on a key) to select one of the 24 cyan (light blue-green) colored
programmable machine function keys. Or use the computer keypad to move
through the keys (the upper left-most key is the default selection when the machine
function key editor is first opened).
End moves the pointer to the last key (lower right-most); Home moves the pointer
to the first key (upper left-most); the arrow keys move the pointer one position in
the direction of the arrow. Press return to select.
Once a particular key location is selected, a second window titled "Machine
Function Keys" will appear. The entries made in this window are used to explicitly
define the chosen key location. Every item appearing in the window requires an
entry. Valid choices for an item are displayed in an overlay. Some items may fillin automatically, depending on a choice made for a previous item.
The program will sequence through the entry items. The underline cursor (in white)
acts as a pointer. Either double click on the item or press return. A list of valid
choices will appear.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 75 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button will scroll the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way and the middle of the
list will show in the window).
Or use the keypad to move through the list. Page Down moves the display down
one page; Page Up moves the display up one page; End moves the display to the
end of the list; Home moves the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys
move the highlighted area one position in the direction of the arrow. Once an entry
appears for each of the items, either "Accept", or "Cancel", or "Clear", or go back
and edit the entries.
To accept, type "A" or position the pointer over the word "Accept" and click the
mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of a particular key.
To cancel, type " C" or position the pointer over the word "Cancel" and click the
mouse. "Cancel" is used to abort the definition of a particular key.
To clear, type " L" or position the pointer over the word "Clear" and click the mouse.
"Clear" is used to eliminate the definition of a particular key (even if already saved).
Once "Clear" has been performed, either "Accept" or "Cancel." Canceling "Clear"
reinstates the key definition. Accepting "Clear" completes the clearing operation
(although an entire editing session can be undone by "Quit without Saving").
If a mistake is made, position the underline cursor in the entry to be changed. Either
use the mouse (click anywhere within the entry) or use the arrow keys. Make
whatever changes are necessary and either "Accept", "Cancel", or "Clear."
Defining the Machine Function Key
Machine function keys are defined from three different types of control relays. The
"Modfile" definition of those CR's determines the scope of the window entries.
CR Type
This is the broadest entry for the definition of a machine function key and
determines which module types (modfiles) will be displayed. There are three
choices:
Operator CR
Momentary Switch CR
Op Selector Switch CR
Module Type
This is the entry that determines which list of descriptors will be displayed. Note that
in addition to the operator control relays located in the "Data Handler," a second
group of operator control relays is located in the "Display Processor." These
"Display Proc" CRs are included as operator CRs (they aren't really operator
control relays) for lack of any better location.
Description
Determines a particular control relay from a particular module type. Once an entry
is made for module type and descriptor, the default settings (if any) appear in the
other entry items.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 76 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Controller Number
Identifies which controller (of ALL attached to a single operator station) this control
relay resides in.
Card Number
Identifies which card of a particular module type (within a particular controller) this
control relay resides in (e.g., the first or second temperature board).
Switch Type/Action
Determines the state the relay will assume when "activated." The choices available
will depend on which of the three CR types has been chosen. For operator CRs,
there are three choices:
Off
On
Toggle

used only to turn CR's off


used only to turn CR's on
changes states at each activation

For momentary switch CRs, there is only one choice:


On

(all momentary switches are defined as momentary On's)

For operator selector switch CRs, there five choices:


Off
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Note that ALL control relays (with the exception of Setup control relays) power up
in the OFF state.
Activating an Off control relay while it is in the Off state will not cause anything to
happen.
Activating an On control relay while it is in the On state will not cause anything to
happen.
Activating a Toggle control relay while it is in the On or Off state will cause it to
change states.
Security Level
Determines the minimum security level necessary in order to activate this CR.
Total range is 1 - 4.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 77 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 78 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Toolbox

Help

Screen. Set
Appl.: Standard
Screen.
.
Editor: none Template. . .
Char set: Ascii Messages. . .
Char size: 8x16maTh editor. . .
Snap: EnabledseCurity
Sound: Disabled
mach Function
keys
Screen name:
saVe
save As
Quit w/o saving
Security Level:
Exit with saving
New

HH:MM:SS AM

1/ 12

Select save file


Present
Name
X

1
rEname

POWERUP
Template
Accept

CR
ACCESS
Cancel

Edit the image name and press

For New (untitled) Screens or Sprites:


Type in a name, Enter a security level, Click on "New" and Click on "Accept."
For Replacement Screens or Sprites:
Click on "Rename," and select the screen or sprite to be replaced. Once the file to be
replaced is chosen,
either: Accept, and the screen on display will be "saved as" the "Existing Filename"
(the screen that was "Existing Filename" will no longer exist)
or:

MACHINE
MONITOR
SEQUENCE
Existing
Filename
System
Monitor
Timeslot
Monitor

Change the "Existing Filename" to "New Name" and then Accept


(the screen that was "Existing Filename" will no longer exist)

3.4.7 Save
Either type a "V" or position the pointer over the word "Save" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Save" and press return. "Save"
is available only if one of the editors is presently open. It is used to save ongoing
work within a particular editor without having to exit the editor. Use "Save" at
regular intervals to avoid the possible loss of work.
"Save As" must be used for any new screens or sprites. It is also the only means
of changing the security level assigned to an existing screen. Once a title has been
assigned to a screen or sprite (using "save As"), then "Save" can be used (text
messages, keywords, security and machine function keys are automatically
assigned a filename by the program, so they never have to be "saved As"). If an
attempt is made to "Save" an untitled screen or sprite, the program will automatically call up the "save As" routine.
3.4.8 Save As
Note that any character set or size can be used to Save As. BEFORE entering Save
As, choose a character set and size from toolbox.
Either type an "A" or position the pointer over the words "save As" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "save As" and press return. "Save
As" is available only if one of the editors is presently open. "Save As" must be used
for any new screens or sprites. Once a title has been assigned to a screen or sprite
using "save As", then "Save" can be used (text messages, keywords, security and
machine function keys are automatically assigned a filename by the program, so
they never have to be "saved As"). If an attempt is made to "Save" an untitled
screen or sprite, the program will automatically call the "save As" routine.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 79 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Save As for New Screens (or Sprites)
With the "New" (untitled) screen or "New" (untitled) sprite displayed, select "save
As." A small window will overlay the screen.
For ASCII character names, simply type in the character from the keyboard. For
non-keyboard ASCII characters, hold down the "Alt" key and type in the decimal
equivalent of the ASCII code USING THE KEYPAD (see the character set Tab for
the ASCII code).
For Japanese, Korean or Special character names, hold down the "Alt" key and
type in the case sensitive Font ID using the keyboard and top row number keys
(NOT the keypad). Note that the Cap Lock key may not work on all computers. If
so, use the Shift key. Once the name to be used is typed in, press return (twice,
if necessary). Enter a security level (screens only) and press return again. Once
the name and security level have been entered, click on "Accept" (or type "Alt A")
to accept or click on "Cancel" (or type "Alt C") to cancel. The new screen or sprite
will be added to the end of the list of existing screens or sprites.
Save As to Replace Existing Screens (or Sprites)
With the replacement (titled or untitled) screen or replacement (titled or untitled)
sprite displayed, select "save As." A small window will overlay the screen. Click on
"Rename" or type "Alt E." A window containing a list of the available screens or
sprites will appear.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button will scroll the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way and the middle of the
list will show in the window).
Or use the keypad to move through the list. Page Down moves the display down
one page; Page Up moves the display up one page; End moves the display to the
end of the list; Home moves the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys
move the highlighted area one position in the direction of the arrow.
Once a screen or sprite is highlighted, double click on the highlighted area or press
return. The window containing the list will disappear and the highlighted name will
appear in the name window.
If the character set or size of the highlighted name does not match the current
character set and size, the question "Use global character settings?" will immediately appear on the screen. Typing "Y" or clicking on "Yes" will cause the character
set and size currently named in the upper left corner of the editor to be used for
renaming. Typing "N" or clicking on "No" will cause the character set and size of
the present name to also be used for the replacement name.
Once a name appears in the "Name" window (or the global character question is
answered), a green underline cursor will also appear.
For ASCII character names, simply type in the character from the keyboard. For
non-keyboard ASCII characters, hold down the "Alt" key and type in the decimal
equivalent of the ASCII code USING THE KEYPAD (see the character set Tab for
the ASCII code).
For Japanese, Korean or Special character names, hold down the "Alt" key and
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 80 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


type in the case sensitive Font ID using the keyboard and top row number keys
(NOT the keypad). Note that the Cap Lock key may not work on all computers. If
so, use the Shift key.
Type in the name to be used and press return (twice, if necessary). Enter a security
level (screens only) and press return again. Once the name and security level have
been entered, click on "Accept" (or type "Alt A") to accept or click on "Cancel" (or
type "Alt C") to cancel.
3.4.9 Quit without Saving
Note that any work performed after the last "Save" or "save As" will be lost.
"Quit w/o saving" is useful for examining existing files or for "backing out of" a major
editing error.
Either type a "Q" or position the pointer over the words "Quit w/o saving" and
release the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Quit w/o saving" and
press return. "Quit w/o saving" is available only if one of the editors is presently
open. It is used to exit whichever editor is presently open.
If "Quit w/o saving" is chosen while the screen editor or sprite editor is open (and
the screen or sprite has been changed), a small window will appear with the
question "Save present screen?" Clicking on "Yes" or typing "Y" will close the editor
and cause the screen or sprite to be saved (if it is untitled, the "save As" routine
will be called). Clicking on "No" or typing "N" will close the editor and cause
whatever changes have been made to the screen or sprite since the last save to
be lost.
3.4.10 Exit with Saving
Either type an "E" or position the pointer over the words "Exit with saving" and
release the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Exit with saving" and
press return. "Exit with saving" is available only if one of the editors is presently
open. It is used to exit whichever editor is presently open and is the normal way
of ending an editing session.
"Save As" must be used for any new screens or sprites. Once a title has been
assigned to a screen or sprite (using "save As"), then "Exit with saving" can be used
(text messages, keywords, security and machine function keys are automatically
assigned a filename by the program, so they never have to be "saved As").
If an attempt is made to "Exit with saving" an untitled screen or sprite, the program
will automatically call up the "save As" routine.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 81 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 82 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

abc F1 Graphic Text


Key F2 Static Keyword

Note that this menu does NOT appear until an


application and a screen have been selected.
Note also that Screens and Sprites are both created using
the graphic elements associated with this menu.
The only difference is that Sprites cannot contain
dynamic elements (control functions, graphs, etc.).
Note also that some menu items and some graphic icons
may not appear depending on the display type being edited.

F3 Select Arrow
F4 Draw Pixel
F5 Draw Rectangle
F6 Draw Circle
F7 Draw Polyline
F8 Paint

4. Screen (or Sprite) Editor Menu


The screen editor menu does NOT appear until an application and a screen have
been selected (under "Application" and then "Editor"). Once a new or existing
screen file has been opened the menu will appear as shown above. Note that more
items appear on the menu bar and the toolbox is expanded.
Cursor coordinates appear on the right side of the menu bar (XXX,YYY). The
coordinates extend from the upper left corner of the editing area (0,0) to the lower
right corner of the editing area (639,335 for the EL; 319,167 for LCDs). The name
of the screen being edited appears inside the box labeled "Image." Three
additional items appear just to the right of the image box.
Mode:
SoftKey page:
No. of ctl. funcs:

"Mode" is the currently selected menu item (will be "none" when the screen editor
is first opened).
"Softkey page" is the currently displayed page of softkeys (shown at the bottom of
the screen - page number one is displayed when the screen editor is first opened).
"No. of cntl. funcs" is the number of control functions (setpoints, values, etc. - see
the menu item) assigned to this particular screen (new screens have zero; complex
screens could have more than one hundred).
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 83 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Rel. X.X
Application

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

OptiGrafix LCD 41Ax User Editor


Editors

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

(XXX,YYY)

Control funcs

Softkey

Toolbox

Image:

Help

HH:MM:SS
(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

Moving around on the Screen


The simplest way of moving around on the screen is to use a mouse, but there are
also a number of keyboard keys which can be used to move the cursor and make
selections. Combined use of the keyboard and mouse is the fastest, most efficient
way to use the program.
The Tab key can be used to move between the menu bar, the editing area and the
softkey area (with a couple of other stops).
From the menu bar, the Left and Right arrow keys can be used to move across and
back the selections. Once the menu is extended, the Up and Down arrow keys can
be used to move up or down the selections.
From the editing area, the arrow keys can be used to move anywhere within the
bounds of the area. "Hot" keys (capitalized menu letters) function from anywhere
on the screen, as well as the "Function" keys assigned to the graphic elements.
Play and learn!
Differences between EL and LCD Screens
The major differences between the two types of screens (and therefore the editors)
are as follows:
Screen Resolution
The EL screen has a 640 x 400 pixel display. The LCD screen has a 320 x 200 pixel
display. When editing screens for the EL operator station, characters appear on
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 84 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


the editor screen much as they appear on the operator station screen. When
editing screens for LCD operator stations, the editor screen presents the image at
twice its normal size.
Graph Functions
The LCD screen is presently not capable of displaying any type of graph.
Softkeys
The EL screen is capable of as many as 6 softkeys per page (3 pages). The LCD
screen is only capable of 5 softkeys per page (3 pages).
Character Set
The EL screen has a complete (except for 3) ASCII character set. The LCD screen
has a limited character set (see Tab marked "Character Sets").
Graphic Icons
The EL display offers a total of eight graphic icons for use in editing screens. Since
the LCD display is presently not capable of graphic functions (other than graphic
text), only three of the graphic icons will appear (note that even though the
"Keyword" icon appears for LCD screens, even if static keywords are programmed
onto a screen, they will NOT appear on the controller screen).
In general, if a selection appears it is available for use. Likewise, if a selection does
not appear, it is not presently available for use.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 85 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 86 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key
F1

with Snap Disabled

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

with Snap Enabled


(invisible grid)

Clicking here
Puts flashing underline cursor here
Character will go here

Clicking here
Snaps crosshair to here
Puts flashing underline cursor here
Character will go here

4.1 Graphic Icons


As many as eight icons may appear in the upper right portion of the screen just
above the editing area.
4.1.1 Graphic Text (F1)
Click once on this icon or press F1 to select graphic text. Select the desired
character set and size in the "Toolbox" BEFORE clicking into the screen editing
area. The selected character set and size are displayed in the upper left portion of
the screen.
The cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing
area. Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar.
To position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or enable "Snap" and click
in and let the program locate the characters relative to an invisible grid.
Or just place the crosshair on the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow
keys to move the crosshair ("Snap" will function if it is enabled). Press return once
the crosshair is positioned.
Once the text is typed in, click the mouse once to free the cursor. Click a second
time to relocate the crosshair.
Previously placed graphic text can be modified, moved or completely deleted from
a screen.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 87 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Modifying Graphic Text
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the text to be modified. A small
"box" will appear at each corner of the text, indicating it has been selected. Once
the text is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Modify Element" or double click
the LEFT mouse button. The underline cursor will appear below the first character.
Type over existing text or use the arrow keys to reposition the cursor and
backspace to eliminate characters.
Moving Graphic Text
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the text to be moved. A small
"box" will appear at each corner of the text, indicating it has been selected. Once
the text is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Move Element" or double click
the RIGHT mouse button. Move the crosshair to the new location and click the
RIGHT mouse button (or press the enter key).
Deleting Graphic Text
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the text to be deleted. A small
"box" will appear at each corner of the text, indicating the text has been selected.
Once the text is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Delete Element."

Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key
F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

Note that this icon appears for both EL and LCD screens, but has NOT been
implemented for LCD screens (if Static Keywords are assigned to LCD screens,
they will not appear once the screen is downloaded to the controller).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 88 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


4.1.2 Static Keywords (F2)
Click once on this icon or press F2 to select static keywords. The cursor will change
from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area. Cursor location will
be displayed on the right side of the menu.
To position the crosshair, either click in at the exact location or enable "Snap" and
click in and let the program locate the characters relative to an invisible grid. Or just
place the crosshair on the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys
to move the crosshair ("Snap" functions if it is enabled). Press return once the
crosshair is positioned. Once return is pressed, the keyword message file will
appear on the screen.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button (between the arrows) will scroll
the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way
and the middle of the list will show in the window).
Or use the keypad to move through the list. Page Down moves the display down
one page; Page Up moves the display up one page; End moves the display to the
end of the list; Home moves the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys
move the highlighted area one position in the direction of the arrow.
Once the proper message is highlighted, either double click directly on the
highlighted message or press return. The keyword message file will disappear and
the chosen keyword will appear on the screen. Be certain to leave enough room
for the longest possible message.
Previously placed static keywords can be moved or deleted from a screen.
Moving Static Keywords
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the static keyword to be moved.
A small "box" will appear at each corner of the keyword, indicating it has been
selected. Once the keyword is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Move
Element" or double click the RIGHT mouse button. Move the crosshair to the new
location and click the RIGHT mouse button.
Deleting Static Keywords
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the static keyword to be deleted.
A small "box" will appear at each corner of the keyword, indicating it has been
selected. Once the keyword is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Delete
Element."

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 89 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key
F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

To Select Any Element


Click on the "Select" icon (or press F3)
Place the crosshair over the element
Either click the LEFT mouse button or press return
A small "box" at each corner indicates the element is selected
"Mode" will indicate the type of element selected
To Move Any Element
Once selected, either double click the RIGHT mouse button
or go to the "Toolbox" and select "Move Element"
The element will attach itself to the crosshair
Reposition the element and click the RIGHT mouse
button or press return
To Modify Any Element
Once selected, either double click the LEFT mouse button
or go to the "Toolbox" and select "Modify Element"

4.1.3 The Select Arrow (F3)


ANY screen element can be selected using the select arrow. Once a screen
element has been placed on a screen, it must be selected before it can be moved,
modified or deleted. Click once on this icon or press F3 to select the "select arrow."
The cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing
area. Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar.
To position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair
on the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the
crosshair. Once the crosshair is positioned over the element to be selected, either
click the mouse button or press return. A small "box" will appear at each corner of
the element, indicating it has been selected. "Mode" will indicate what type of
element has been selected.
Modifying an Element
Once the element is selected, double click the LEFT mouse button or go to the
"Toolbox" and select "modify Element." If a graphic element has been selected,
press and hold the LEFT mouse button to resize or alter the element. If a dynamic
element has been selected, its menu box will appear. Click in with the mouse or
use the arrow keys to select the specific parameter to be changed and then double
click or press return to bring up the window. Once all the changes are made, type
"Alt A" or click on "Accept" (or "Cancel").
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 90 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Moving an Element
Once the element is selected, double click the RIGHT mouse button or go to the
"Toolbox" and select "Move element." The element will attach itself to the
crosshair. Move the crosshair to the new location and click the RIGHT mouse
button or press return.
Deleting an Element
Once the element is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Delete element." The
element will immediately be removed from the screen. Note that the only way to
recover a deleted item is to "Quit without Saving."

Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Control funcs

Graph

Image: Screen
Test 1

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key
F1

To Draw
Press here
Drag to here and release
Holding down CTRL
while drawing will
create a SQUARE

1640-IN-006-0-02

Softkey

HH:MM:SS

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

To Select
First click on the "Select" icon (F3)
Then click anywhere within the rectangle

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 91 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


4.1.4 Draw Pixel (F4)
Click once on this icon or press F4 to select "draw pixel." The cursor will change
from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area. Cursor location will
be displayed on the right side of the menu bar.
To position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair
on the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the
crosshair. "Snap" does NOT function with draw pixel. Clicking the mouse or
pressing return will turn on the pixel at the center of the crosshair. If graphics
require a complex line or an open curve or arc, this is the only way to do it.
Previously placed pixels can be moved or completely deleted from a screen.
Deleting a Pixel
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the pixel to be deleted. A small
"box" will appear at each corner of the pixel, indicating it has been selected. Once
the pixel is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Delete element."
4.1.5 Draw Rectangle (F5)
Click once on this icon or press F5 to select "draw rectangle." The cursor will
change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area. Cursor
location will be displayed on the right side of the menu.
To position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair
on the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the
crosshair. "Snap" does NOT function with draw rectangle. Pressing (and holding)
the mouse button or pressing return will establish one corner of the rectangle
(simultaneously pressing and holding the CTRL key will cause the rectangle to be
a square). Use the mouse or the arrow keys to move the cursor. Releasing the
mouse button or pressing return a second time will establish the diagonal corner
of the rectangle.
Previously placed rectangles can be modified, moved or deleted from a screen.
Modifying a Rectangle
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the rectangle to be modified. A
small "box" will appear at each corner of the rectangle, indicating it has been
selected. Once the rectangle is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "modify
Element" or double click the LEFT mouse button. A message stating to "Press and
hold the left mouse button in order to modify the element." will appear. Acknowledge the message and then press and hold the left mouse button. The second
corner of the rectangle will attach itself to the cursor until the button is released.
Moving a Rectangle
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the rectangle to be moved. A
small "box" will appear at each corner of the rectangle, indicating it has been
selected. Once the rectangle is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Move
element" or double click the RIGHT mouse button. Move the crosshair to the new
location and click the RIGHT mouse button.
Deleting a Rectangle
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the rectangle to be deleted. A
small "box" will appear at each corner of the rectangle, indicating it has been
selected. Go to the "Toolbox" and select "Delete element."
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 92 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key
F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

To Move

To Draw
Press here

First click on "Select" icon (F3)


Then click here
Then double click RIGHT mouse button
Box attaches to cursor here

(circle will not be visible)

Drag to here and release


Circle (not yet visible) will be here

Click RIGHT mouse button again to place

4.1.6 Draw Circle (F6)


Click once on this icon or press F6 to select "draw circle." The cursor will change
from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area. Cursor location will
be displayed on the right side of the menu bar.
To position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair
on the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the
crosshair. "Snap" does NOT function with draw circle. Pressing (and holding) the
mouse button or pressing return will establish one corner of a dashed square. The
dashed square defines the outside of the circle. Use the mouse or the arrow keys
to move the cursor. Releasing the mouse button or pressing return a second time
will establish the side of the dashed square (which is equal to the diameter of the
circle). The dashed square immediately disappears and is replaced by a circle.
Previously placed circles can be modified, moved or deleted from a screen.
Modifying a Circle
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the circle to be modified. A small
"box" will appear at each corner, indicating it has been selected. Once the circle
is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "modify Element" or double click the
LEFT mouse button. A message stating to "Press and hold the left mouse button
in order to modify the element." will appear. Acknowledge the message and then
press and hold the left mouse button. The corner of the dashed square will attach
itself to the cursor until the button is released.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 93 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Moving a Circle
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the circle to be moved. A small
"box" will appear at each corner, indicating it has been selected. Once the circle
is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Move element" or double click the
RIGHT mouse button. A square the size of the circle attaches to the cursor. Move
the crosshair to the new location and click the RIGHT mouse button.
Deleting a Circle
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the circle to be deleted. A small
"box" will appear at each corner, indicating it has been selected. Once the circle
is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Delete element."

Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Image: Screen
Test 1

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key
F1

To draw a simple line

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

To draw a complex line


(this is treated as a single line)
Release and Press

Press here

Press here
Release and Press

Release and Press


Drag to here and release

1640-IN-006-0-02

Release and Press

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 94 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


4.1.7 Draw Polyline (F7)
Click once on this icon or press F7 to select "draw polyline." The cursor will change
from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area. Cursor location will
be displayed on the right side of the menu.
To position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair
on the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the
crosshair. Pressing (and holding) the mouse button or pressing return will establish
one end of the line. Use the mouse or the arrow keys to move the cursor. Releasing
the mouse button or pressing return a second time will establish a segment of the
line. Continuing the line immediately (without moving the cursor) by pressing (and
holding) the mouse button or pressing return will cause the line to be treated as a
single object. A number of contiguous line segments can be used to form any kind
of irregular polygon (which in turn can be filled).
Previously placed polylines can be modified, moved or deleted from a screen.
Modifying a Polyline
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the line to be modified. A small
"box" will appear at each corner of it, indicating the line has been selected. Once
the line is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "modify Element" or double click
the LEFT mouse button. A message stating to "Press and hold the left mouse
button in order to modify the element." will appear. Acknowledge the message and
then press and hold the left mouse button. A segment extending from the endpoint
of the polyline will attach itself to the cursor until the button is released.
Moving a Polyline
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the line to be moved. A small
"box" will appear at each corner of the line, indicating it has been selected. Once
the polyline is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Move element" or double
click the RIGHT mouse button. Move the crosshair to the new location and click
the RIGHT mouse button.
Deleting a Polyline
Click on the "Select" arrow. Click the crosshair on the line to be deleted. A small
"box" will appear at each corner of it, indicating the line has been selected. Once
the line is selected, go to the "Toolbox" and select "Delete element."

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 95 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key
F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

Always Redraw after performing a paint!


Redrawing assures that an accurate
rendition of the screen is being viewed
4.1.8 Paint (or Fill)(F8)
Click once on this icon or press F8 to select "paint." The cursor will change from
an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area. Cursor location is
displayed on the right side of the menu bar. To position the crosshair, click in at the
exact location or just place the crosshair on the editing area (without clicking in) and
use the arrow keys. Use the mouse or the arrow keys to move the cursor.

Only Circles, Rectangles or Closed Polylines should be Filled


Do NOT attempt to fill an unclosed polyline!
Using the "select arrow", position the crosshair over the element to be filled and
click the mouse or press return. A small "box" will appear at each corner of the
element, indicating it has been selected. Once the element is selected, press F8
or select the paint icon. The element will fill inversely to its present shade (if it is
not filled, it will fill; if it is filled, it will unfill).
Filling works by a complicated set of rules. ALWAYS redraw after filling in order
to view an accurate rendition of the screen. A few other basic guidelines:
A) Setpoints, values, security setpoints and graphs are considered non-inverting
elements. They appear on a screen in only one manner:
A setpoint will always appear with an illuminated background and
non-illuminated digits.
A value will always appear with a non-illuminated background and
illuminated digits.
A message will always appear with a non-illuminated background and
illuminated digits.
A graph will always appear with a non-illuminated background and
illuminated lines.
In addition, the above items will always appear in the foreground of the screen.
B) Control relays, system commands and incr/decr setpoint always appear as the
inverse of whatever background they happen to occupy.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 96 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16 Setpoint
Module
type:Enabled
Snap:
Sound: Disabled
Descriptor:
Controller number:
Card number:

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Setpoint
Value
Test 1
Control relays. . .
Messages. . .
sYstem commands
Incr/decr setpoint
Global 1
sEcurity setpoint
Global 2
Paths

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

Integer digits:
Fractional digits:
High limit:
Low limit:

Note that Control Functions will NOT appear until


an application and a screen have been selected.

Power-up:
Security level:
Recipe dependent:

Refer to the Text Files supplied on the Modfile disk.


Print the text files as a reference for definitions and limits.

Machine dependent:
Accept

Cancel

See Installation Procedure.

(or Alt A) (or Alt C)

4.2 Control Functions (n/a for Sprites)


Select the control functions menu by typing "C" (the highlighted letter) or positioning the pointer over the top of the words "Control funcs" and pressing (and holding)
the left mouse button. The words "Control funcs" will highlight and the menu will
extend downward. If an item is followed by an ellipsis, a further decision is
necessary. To make a selection from within the menu, either type the highlighted
letter within the menu item or position the pointer (now a small hand) over the item
(and release the mouse button) or use the Up and Down arrow keys to highlight
an item (and press return).
4.2.1 Setpoint
A setpoint is a numerical setting which is used to determine a variety of different
controller settings. Some setpoints determine the setting at which you wish to
control (temperature, percent, pressure, etc.), as well as the limits of those
settings. Some setpoints determine the mode of control (where certain numbers
cause certain action, e.g., 1=direct, 2=reverse, etc.).
Either type an "S" or position the pointer over the word "Setpoint" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Setpoint" and press return. The
cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area.
Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar.
To position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair
on the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the
crosshair (and press return). "Snap" does function with "Setpoint."
Once the crosshair is clicked in (it marks the upper-left corner of the setpoint area),
a window titled "Setpoint" will overlay the screen. The entries made in this window
are used to explicitly define the setpoint being placed.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 97 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Some setpoints may not be "user editable." Every item appearing in the window
will require an entry. Valid choices for an item will be displayed in an overlay. Some
entries may fill in automatically, depending on a choice made for a previous item.
Changes "may impact other occurrences" of the element. Other warnings or
cautions may appear, depending on the item or attempted entry to that item. The
program will sequence through the entry items. The underline cursor (in white) acts
as a pointer. Either double click on the item or press return. In most cases a list of
valid choices will appear.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button (between the arrows) will scroll
the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way
and the middle of the list will show in the window). Or use the keypad to move
through the list. Page Down moves the display down one page; Page Up moves
the display up one page; End moves the display to the end of the list; Home moves
the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys move the highlighted area
one position in the direction of the arrow.
For items requiring multi-digit numeric entries (upper limit, lower limit, power-up,
etc.), double clicking or pressing return will cause the white underline cursor to be
replaced by a green underline cursor. Once the green underline cursor appears,
type in the correct number. A minus sign must be used for negative numbers.
Negative numbers can only be used with bipolar setpoints (see modfile printout).
Unsigned numbers will be treated as positive numbers.
Once an entry has been made for each of the items, either "Accept" , "Cancel" or
go back and edit the entries. To accept, type "Alt A" or position the pointer over the
word "Accept" and click the mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of
a particular setpoint. To cancel, type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word
"Cancel" and click the mouse. "Cancel" is used to abort the definition of a setpoint.
If a mistake has been made, position the underline cursor in the entry to be
changed. Either use the mouse (click anywhere within the entry) or use the arrow
keys. Once the (white) underline cursor is in the entry, either double click the
mouse or press return. Make whatever changes are necessary and either "Accept"
or "Cancel."
Once "Accepted", the window will disappear and the setpoint will be displayed on
the screen as a series of S's with an illuminated background and non-illuminated
digits. If it is unipolar, it will be preceded by a plus sign. If bipolar, it will be preceded
by a plus/minus sign. Once the first setpoint of an editing session has been placed
on a screen, each time the "setpoint" window appears, it will appear with the
previously entered data on display. This allows for quick entry of similar setpoints.
Changing "Module Types" for Setpoints
If a setpoint or value has already been programmed to a screen, do NOT attempt
to edit it by changing the "Module Type" (for instance, when editing an existing
screen and attempting to place a hydraulic setpoint in the same area that a
temperature setpoint currently occupies). Incorrect information will be attached to
the "Integer" and "Fraction" fields. To avoid the problem, first delete the setpoint
or value to be replaced, and then place the new setpoint or value on the screen.
The same issue arises when using the Line Graph Configuration Editor or the SPC
Configuration Editor. "Delete" or "Clear" the setpoint or value when changing to
another module type.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 98 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Defining the Setpoint
The "Modfile" definition of the setpoint determines the limits of the window
entries. If a setpoint has been defined as not "user editable", the entries which
appear can't be changed (see the README file on the modfile disk for what
defines a setpoint in the modfile).
Module Type
This is the broadest entry for the definition of a setpoint and determines which
list of descriptors is displayed.
Descriptor
Determines a particular setpoint within a particular module type. Once an entry
is made for module type and descriptor, default settings appear for other entries.
Controller Number
Identifies which controller (of ALL attached to a single operator station) this
setpoint resides in.
Global 1
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL setpoints
FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the same
controller number that appears in the controller number box. ("Global 1" is
especially helpful on systems with multiple control racks).

Setpoints with:
Recipe Dependent = YES
Machine Dependent = NO

Setpoints with:
Recipe Dependent = NO
Machine Dependent = YES

Setpoints with:
Recipe Dependent = YES
Machine Dependent = YES

Setup Control Relays 1825 - 1848

Setup Selector Switches 1849 - 1880


Setup Control Relays 1785 - 1824

These are saved with a "Copy Recipe"


These are saved with a "Copy Insta-Set"

Setpoints with:
Recipe Dependent = NO
Machine Dependent = NO
Momentary Switch CRs 1753 - 1784
Momentary Switch CRs 1913 - 1944
Operator CRs 1657 - 1752
Operator Selector Switches 1881 - 1912*

These are NOT saved


* Beginning with V20.x6 Data Handler firmware, a method was added for saving these CRs. Refer to the Data
Handler Programming section (1640-IN-034-0-XX).
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 99 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Card Number
Identifies which card of a particular module type (within a particular controller) this
setpoint resides in (e.g., the first or second temperature board).
Global 2
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL setpoints
FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the same card
number that appears in the card number box. ("Global 2" is especially helpful on
systems with multiple cards of the same function).
Integer Digits
Determines the number of whole number (to the left of the decimal point) digits to
be displayed. This entry can be from a minimum of one (1) to a maximum of five
(5). The total number of digits (integer plus fractional) cannot exceed five (5). Note
that a 5 digit number takes up as many as 7 spaces (5 digits, a decimal point and
a sign). Note also that the number of fractional digits may have been fixed in the
modfile (see modfile printout).
Fractional Digits
Determines the number of fractional number (to the right of the decimal point) digits
to be displayed. This entry can be from a minimum of zero (0) to a maximum of four
(4). The total number of digits (integer plus fractional) cannot exceed five (5). Note
that a 5 digit number takes up as many as 7 spaces (5 digits, a decimal point and
a sign). Note also that the number of fractional digits may have been fixed in the
modfile (see modfile printout).
High Limit
Determines the highest possible setting for this setpoint. The limit for this entry is
fixed in the modfile, but may be further constrained here. The highest possible limit
for a unipolar setpoint is 65535. The highest possible limit for a bipolar setpoint is
32767 (see modfile printout).
Low Limit
Determines the lowest possible setting for this setpoint. The limit for this entry is
fixed in the modfile, but may be further constrained here. The lowest possible limit
for a unipolar setpoint is 0. The lowest possible limit for a bipolar setpoint is -32768
(see modfile printout).
Power-up
Determines the power-up setting of this setpoint. Note that the ability to make or
change an entry here is determined in the modfile (see modfile printout).
Security Level
Determines the minimum security necessary in order to change this setpoint. Total
range is 1 - 4, but minimum is determined in modfile (see modfile printout).
Recipe Dependent
Determines whether this setpoint will be recipe dependent or not. A "Y" entry
means that when a "Copy Recipe" is performed, this setpoint's setting will be
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 100 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


copied. This entry may have been fixed by the modfile. Note that a setpoint may
be either recipe dependent, or machine dependent, or both, or neither.
Machine Dependent
Determines whether this setpoint will be machine dependent or not. A "Y" entry
means that when a "Copy Insta-Set" is performed, this setpoint's setting will be
copied. This entry may have been fixed by the modfile. Note that a setpoint may
be either recipe dependent, or machine dependent, or both, or neither.

Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Setpoint
Value
Test 1
Control relays. . .
Messages. . .
sYstem commands
Incr/decr setpoint
sEcurity setpoint
Paths

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

Refer to the Text Files


supplied on the
Modfile disk.

Value
Module type:
Descriptor:
Controller number:

Global 1

Card number:

Global 2

Print the text files


as a reference for
definitions and limits.

Integer digits:
Fractional digits:
Accept

(or Alt A)
1640-IN-006-0-02

See Installation Procedure.

Cancel

(or Alt C)
Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 101 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


4.2.2 Value
A Value is a measured or "sensed" number. A value can be used to monitor a
control process (by displaying temperature, percent, pressure, etc.), as well as
time, diagnostics and other information.
Either type a "V" or position the pointer over the word "Value" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Value" and press return. The
cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area.
Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar.
To position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair
on the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the
crosshair (and press return). "Snap" does function with "Value."
Once the crosshair is clicked in (it marks the upper-left corner of the value area),
a window titled "Value" will overlay the screen. The entries made in this window are
used to explicitly define the value being placed.
Some values may not be "user editable." Every item appearing in the window will
require an entry. Valid choices for an item will be displayed in an overlay. Some
entries may fill in automatically, depending on a choice made for a previous item.
Changes "may impact other occurrences" of the element. Other warnings or
cautions may appear, depending on the item or attempted entry to that item. The
program will sequence through the entry items. The underline cursor (in white) acts
as a pointer. Either click on the item or press return. In most cases a list of valid
choices will appear.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button (between the arrows) will scroll
the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way
and the middle of the list will show in the window). Or use the keypad to move
through the list. Page Down moves the display down one page; Page Up moves
the display up one page; End moves the display to the end of the list; Home moves
the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys move the highlighted area
one position in the direction of the arrow.
Once an entry has been made for each item, either "Accept," "Cancel" or go back
and edit the entries. To accept, type "Alt A" or position the pointer over the word
"Accept" and click the mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of a
particular value. To cancel, type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word
"Cancel" and click. "Cancel" is used to abort the definition of a particular value.
If a mistake has been made, position the underline cursor in the entry to be
changed. Either use the mouse (click anywhere within the entry) or use the arrow
keys. Once the (white) underline cursor is in the entry, either double click the
mouse or press return. Make whatever changes are necessary and either "Accept"
or "Cancel." Once "Accepted", the window will disappear and the value will be
displayed on the screen as a series of V's with a non-illuminated background and
illuminated digits. If the value is unipolar, it will be preceded by a plus sign. If bipolar,
it will be preceded by a plus/minus sign.
Once the first value of an editing session has been placed on a screen, each time
the "value" window appears, it will appear with the previously entered data on
display. This allows for quick entry of similar values.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 102 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Changing "Module Types" forValues
If a setpoint or value has already been programmed to a screen, do NOT attempt
to edit it by changing the "Module Type" (for instance, when editing an existing
screen and attempting to place a hydraulic setpoint in the same area that a
temperature setpoint currently occupies). Incorrect information will be attached to
the "Integer" and "Fraction" fields. To avoid the problem, first delete the setpoint
or value to be replaced, and then place the new setpoint or value on the screen.
The same issue arises when using the Line Graph Configuration Editor or the SPC
Configuration Editor. "Delete" or "Clear" the setpoint or value when changing to
another module type.
Defining the Value
The "Modfile" definition of the value determines the limits of the window entries
(see the README file on the modfile disk for what defines a value in the modfile).
Module Type
This is the broadest entry for the definition of a value and determines which list of
descriptors will be displayed.
Descriptor
Determines a particular value within a particular module type. Once an entry is
made for module type and descriptor, default settings appear in the other entries.
Controller Number
Identifies the controller (of ALL attached to a single operator station) in which this
value resides.
Global 1
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL values
FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the same
controller number that appears in the controller number box. ("Global 1" is
especially helpful on systems with multiple control racks).
Card Number
Identifies which card of a particular module type (within a particular controller) this
value resides in (e.g., the first or second temperature board).
Global 2
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL values
FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the same card
number that appears in the card number box. ("Global 2" is especially helpful on
systems with multiple cards of the same function).
Integer Digits
Determines the number of whole number (to the left of the decimal point) digits to
be displayed. This entry can be from a minimum of one (1) to a maximum of five
(5). The total number of digits (integer plus fractional) cannot exceed five (5). Note
that a 5 digit number takes up as many as 7 spaces (5 digits, a decimal point and
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 103 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


a sign). Note also that the number of fractional digits may have been fixed in the
modfile (see modfile printout).
Fractional Digits
Determines the number of fractional number (to the right of the decimal point) digits
to be displayed. This entry can be from a minimum of zero (0) to a maximum of four
(4). The total number of digits (integer plus fractional) cannot exceed five (5). Note
that a 5 digit number takes up as many as 7 spaces (5 digits, a decimal point and
a sign). Note also that the number of fractional digits may have been fixed in the
modfile (see modfile printout).
Note that Math Register Values take up 7 character spaces regardless of the
number of digits programmed to the screen.

Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1 Setpoint


Image: Screen
Mode: None
Editor: Screen
SoftKey page: 1
Value
Test 1
Char set: Ascii
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
Control relays. . .
oPerator cr
Char size: 8x16
Messages. . .
Momentary switch cr
Operator Control Relay
Snap: Enabled
sYstem commands Op selector switchabc
cr Key
Module type:
Sound:
Disabled
Incr/decr setpoint
setup operator Cr
Descriptor:
sEcurity setpoint
setUp op selector switch cr
Global
1
Controller number:
Paths
Global 2

Card number:
Switch type/action:

Refer to the Text Files


supplied on the
Modfile disk.

Security level:
Horizontal size:
Vertical size:
Accept

Print the text files


as a reference for
definitions and limits.

Cancel

(or Alt A) (or Alt C)


1640-IN-006-0-02

See Installation Procedure.

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 104 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


4.2.3 Control Relays
A control relay is an addressable location which is the electronic equivalent of an
electro-mechanical relay. A control relay is either on or off and can be examined
as often as necessary in the Relay Logic Diagram (RLD). The on and off state of
each control relay is determined by the state of an input, by the logic program or
by process conditions.
Either type a "C" or position the pointer over the words "Control Relays" and
release the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Control Relays" and
press return. A menu will appear displaying five choices:
Operator CR
Momentary Switch CR
Operator Selector Switch CR
Setup Operator CR
Setup Operator Selector Switch CR
Either type the highlighted letter or position the pointer over the proper selection
and click the mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight the selection and press
return. The cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the
editing area. Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar. To
position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair on
the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the crosshair
(and press return). "Snap" does function with "Control Relays."
Once the crosshair is clicked in (it marks the upper-left corner of the control relay
area), a window titled "...Control Relay" will overlay the screen. The entries made
in this window are used to explicitly define the control relay being placed.
Every item appearing in the window will require an entry. Valid choices for an item
will be displayed in an overlay. Some entries may fill in automatically, depending
on a choice made for a previous item. Warnings or cautions may appear,
depending on the item or attempted entry to that item. The program will sequence
through the entry items. The underline cursor (in white) acts as a pointer. Either
double click on the item or press return. Usually a list of valid choices appears.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button (between the arrows) will scroll
the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way
and the middle of the list will show in the window). Or use the keypad to move
through the list. Page Down moves the display down one page; Page Up moves
the display up one page; End moves the display to the end of the list; Home moves
the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys move the highlighted area
one position in the direction of the arrow.
For items requiring numeric entries (size), double clicking or pressing return will
cause the white underline cursor to be replaced by a green underline cursor. Once
the green underline cursor appears, type in the correct number. Once an entry has
been made for each of the items, either "Accept" , "Cancel" or go back and edit the
entries. To accept, type "Alt A" or position the pointer over the word "Accept" and
click the mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of a particular control
relay. To cancel, type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word "Cancel" and click
the mouse. "Cancel" is used to abort the definition of a particular control relay.
If a mistake has been made, position the underline cursor in the entry to be
changed. Either use the mouse (click anywhere within the entry) or use the arrow
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 105 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


keys. Once the (white) underline cursor is in the entry, either double click the
mouse or press return. Make whatever changes are necessary and either "Accept"
or "Cancel." Once "Accepted", the window will disappear and the control relay will
be displayed on the screen as an illuminated rectangular block.
Once the first control relay of an editing session has been placed on a screen, each
time this same control relay window appears, it will appear with the previously
entered data on display. This allows for quick entry of similar control relays.
Defining the Control Relay
The "Modfile" definition of the control relay determines limits of the window entries
(see the README file on the modfile disk for what defines a CR in the modfile).
Control Relay Types
The control relays appearing under this control function are all Data Handler (or
Display Processor) control relays reserved for use with operator panel control
functions. They are divided into five distinct categories:
Operator Control Relays
These 96 CRs (system address 1657-1752) are typically used to enable/disable
outputs or enable calibration, etc. This group of CRs is NOT saved on Insta-Set.
Momentary Switch CRs
These 32 CRs (system address 1753-1784) are typically used for retuning or for
calibration functions where only momentary switch closures are required. This
group of CRs is NOT saved on Insta-Set.
Operator Selector Switch CRs
These eight switches utilize 32 CRs (system address 1881-1912). Each of the
eight switches has four On positions (as well as the Off position). This group of
switches is NOT saved on Insta-Set.
Setup Operator Control Relays
These 64 CRs (system address 1785-1848) are typically used to enable/disable
outputs. This group of CRs IS saved on Insta-Set and are further broken into two
subgroups. Forty of these CRs (system address 1785-1824) are saved with
recipes (mold data) and the other twenty-four of these CRs (system address 18251848) are saved as Insta-Sets (machine data, sensor length, calibration data, etc.).
When power is applied, all of the setup operator CRs will assume the status at
which they were saved.
Setup Operator Selector Switch CRs
These eight switches utilize 32 CRs (system address 1849-1880). Each of the
eight switches has four On positions (as well as the Off position). This group of
switches IS saved on Insta-Set. When power is applied, all of the setup operator
selector CRs will assume the status at which they were saved.
Module Type
This is the broadest entry for the definition of a control relay and determines which
list of descriptors will be displayed. All of the control relays appearing in these
windows reside in the Data Handler modfile, with the exception of a second group
of operator control relays which are located in the "Display Processor" modfile.
These "Display Proc" CRs are included here (they aren't really operator CRs) for
lack of any better location.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 106 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Descriptor
Determines a particular control relay within a particular module type. Once an entry
is made for module type and descriptor, default settings appear in the other entries.
Controller Number
Identifies which controller (of ALL attached to a single operator station) this control
relay resides in.
Global 1
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL control
relays FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the same
controller number that appears in the controller number box. ("Global 1" is
especially helpful on systems with multiple control racks).
Card Number
Identifies which card of a particular module type (within a particular controller) this
control relay resides in (e.g., the first or second temperature board).
Global 2
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL control
relays FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the same
card number that appears in the card number box. ("Global 2" is especially helpful
on systems with multiple cards of the same function).

Setpoints with:
Recipe Dependent = YES
Machine Dependent = NO

Setpoints with:
Recipe Dependent = NO
Machine Dependent = YES

Setpoints with:
Recipe Dependent = YES
Machine Dependent = YES

Setup Control Relays 1825 - 1848

Setup Selector Switches 1849 - 1880


Setup Control Relays 1785 - 1824

These are saved with a "Copy Recipe"


These are saved with a "Copy Insta-Set"

Setpoints with:
Recipe Dependent = NO
Machine Dependent = NO
Momentary Switch CRs 1753 - 1784
Momentary Switch CRs 1913 - 1944
Operator CRs 1657 - 1752
Operator Selector Switches 1881 - 1912*

These are NOT saved


* Beginning with V20.x6 Data Handler firmware, a method was added for saving these CRs. Refer to the Data
Handler Programming section (1640-IN-034-0-XX).
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 107 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Switch Type/Action
Determines the state the relay will assume when "activated." The switch type/
action choices depend on the type of control relay being placed:
Operator Cr's and Setup Operator CR's
There are three choices:
Off
On
Toggle

used only to turn CR's off


used only to turn CR's on
changes states at each activation

Note that Setup Operator control relays power up in the state in which they were
saved. All other operator CRs power up in the OFF state.
Momentary Switch CR's
There is only one choice:
Momentary (On)
Momentary CRs always power up in the OFF state.
Operator Selector Switch Cr's and Setup Operator Selector Switch CR's
There are five choices:
Off
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Note that Setup Operator Selector Switch control relays power up in the state
in which they were saved. All other operator selector switch CRs power up in the
OFF state.
Activating an Off CR while it is in the Off state will not cause anything to happen.
Activating an On CR while it is in the On state will not cause anything to happen.
Activating a Toggle CR while it is in the On or Off state will cause it to change states.
Security Level
Determines the minimum security level necessary in order to change this control
relay. Total range is 1 - 4.
Horizontal Size
Determines the horizontal component of the interactive area of this control relay.
Note that entry is made in numbers of 8-pixel blocks.
Vertical Size
Determines the vertical component of the interactive area of this control relay. Note
that entry is made in numbers of 8-pixel blocks but must be made to equal a multiple
of 16 (just use even numbers).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 108 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1 Setpoint


Image: Screen
Mode: None
Editor: Screen
SoftKey page: 1
Value
Test 1
Char set: Ascii
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
Control relays. . .
Char size: 8x16
Messages. . .
System/status cr
Snap: Enabled System/Status CR
sYstem
oPerator cr
Message commands
abc Key
Sound: Disabled
Incr/decr
setpoint
Momentary switch cr
Module type:
sEcurity setpoint
Op selector switch cr
Descriptor:
Paths
setup operator Cr
Controller number:
Global
1
setUp op selector switch cr
Card number:
Global 2
module Displayable
Message source:
module Ascii string
Horizontal size:
Vertical size:
Accept

Cancel

(or Alt A) (or Alt C)

4.2.4 Messages
Messages can be assigned to a variety of control relay types, as well as to system
commands. In addition they can be assigned to "Module Displayable" functions
and "Module ASCII String" functions. A separate message can be assigned to
each "state" of the assigned function. When the "state" changes, the displayed
message will change.
There are three different types of message files associated with each application:
Text messages, which can be from 1 to 64 characters long; Keyword messages,
which can be from 1 to 32 characters long; and "Sprites" which are graphic
elements (created using the Sprite Editor) that can be used to display pictures or
to actually animate screens.
Either type an "M" or position the pointer over the word "Messages" and release
the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Messages" and press return.
A menu will appear displaying eight choices:
System/Status cr
Operator cr
Momentary Switch cr
Op Selector Switch cr
Setup Operator Cr
Setup Op Selector Switch cr
Module Displayable
Module Ascii String
Either type the highlighted letter or position the pointer over the proper selection
and click the mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight the selection and press
return. The cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the
editing area. Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar. To
position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair on
the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the crosshair
(and press return). "Snap" functions with "Messages."
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 109 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Once the crosshair is clicked in (it marks the upper-left corner of the message
area), a window titled "...Message" will overlay the screen. The entries made in this
window are used to define the message being placed.
Every item appearing in the window will require an entry. Valid choices for an item
will be displayed in an overlay. Some entries may fill in automatically, depending
on a choice made for a previous item. Warnings or cautions may appear,
depending on the item or attempted entry to that item. The program will sequence
through the entry items. The underline cursor (in white) acts as a pointer. Either
double click on the item or press return. In most cases valid choices will appear in
the list box.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button (between the arrows) will scroll
the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way
and the middle of the list will show in the window). Or use the keypad to move
through the list. Page Down moves the display down one page; Page Up moves
the display up one page; End moves the display to the end of the list; Home moves
the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys move the highlighted area
one position in the direction of the arrow.
For items requiring numeric entries (size), double clicking or pressing return will
cause the white underline cursor to be replaced by a green underline cursor. Once
the green underline cursor appears, type in the correct number. Once an entry has
been made for each of the items, either "Accept" , "Cancel" or go back and edit the
entries. To accept, type "Alt A" or position the pointer over the word "Accept" and
click the mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of a particular
message. To cancel, type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word "Cancel" and
click the mouse. "Cancel" is used to abort the definition of a particular message.
If a mistake has been made, position the underline cursor in the entry to be
changed. Either use the mouse (click anywhere in the entry) or use the arrow keys.
Once the (white) underline cursor is in the entry, either double click the mouse or
press return. Make whatever changes are necessary and either "Accept" or
"Cancel." Once "Accepted", the window will disappear and the message area will
be displayed on the screen as a non-illuminated background and illuminated M's.
Once the first message of an editing session has been placed on a screen, each
time this same window appears, it will appear with the previously entered data on
display. This allows for quick entry of similar messages.
Defining the Message
Message Types
The menu items include those of the control relay menu and 3 additional choices.
System/Status Crs
Includes all CRs with a system address, as well as those labeled as status CRs in
the modfile. They have only an "On" and an "Off" state. Note that although ALL
control relays with a system address are usually referred to as "System" CR's, most
of the "special cases" of "System" CR's are not included in this descriptor group
(operator CR's, momentary switch CR's and setup operator CR's - each of these
items has its own heading in this menu).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 110 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Operator CRs
Includes the 96 CRs (system address 1657-1752) typically used to enable/disable
outputs or enable, etc. This group of relays is NOT saved on Insta-Set. They have
only an "On" and an "Off" state.
Momentary Switch CRs
Includes the 32 CRs (system address 1753-1784) typically used for retuning or
calibration functions. This group of relays is NOT saved on Insta-Set. They have
only an "On" and an "Off" state.
Operator Selector Switch CRs
Includes the eight operator selector switches. This group is NOT saved on InstaSet. Selector switches can have as many as five different states.
Setup Operator CRs
Includes the 64 CRs (system address 1785-1848) typically used to enable/disable
outputs or enable calibration, etc. This group of relays IS saved on Insta-Set. They
have only an "On" and an "Off" state.
Setup Operator Selector Switch CRs
Includes the eight operator selector switches. This group IS saved on Insta-Set.
Selector switches can have as many as five different states.
Module Displayable Messages
The Temperature, Data Handler, Hydraulic and Display Processor Modfiles each
have software which points to programmed locations within the message file
(usually the text message file). Note that only the FIRST state of a module
displayable message needs to be assigned (to act as the pointer to the other
messages). See the appendixes for a list of the module displayable messages by
modfile (and the pointer location). Do NOT change the number of states of a
module displayable message or the context of the message to be displayed.
Module ASCII Strings
The Sequence, Temperature, Display Processor and Data Handler modfiles each
have software which under certain conditions will cause specific internal information to be displayed. The number of states and the message are determined by the
software. All that is possible to do is to program an area for the message to appear.
Operator selector switch CR's and setup operator selector switch CR's appear
both in the system/status CR list AND under their own individual headings. In the
system/status CR list each state has its own descriptor (i.e., Setup Sel Switch 1,
Pos 1). This makes it possible to assign messages for individual states to separate
locations on a screen. In the selector switch CR headings a single descriptor
appears for each switch (i.e., Setup Sel Switch 1). This makes it possible to locate
a message for each of the five states in ONE screen location.
Module Type
This is the broadest entry for the definition of a message and determines which list
of descriptors is displayed.
Descriptor
Determines a particular control relay, module displayable mesage or ASCII string
within a particular module type. Once an entry is made for module type and
descriptor, default settings appear in the other entries.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 111 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Controller Number
Identifies which controller (of ALL attached to a single operator station) this
descriptor resides in.
Global 1
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL message
types FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the same
controller number that appears in the controller number box. ("Global 1" is
especially helpful on systems with multiple control racks).
Card Number
Identifies which card of a particular module type (within a particular controller) this
descriptor resides in (e.g., the first or second temperature board).
Global 2
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL message
types FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the same
card number that appears in the card number box. ("Global 2" is especially helpful
on systems with multiple cards of the same function).
Message Source
Determines the file from which a particular message will be taken. There are four
choices:
Character
Keyword

Text
Sprite

Once a file is chosen, specific choices for EACH state of the message must also
be made from within the chosen file. Depending on which of the four files has been
chosen, a prompt of some sort will appear:

Character messages will prompt for a single character to act as the first state
message in the set and size appearing in the upper left portion of the screen.
If character set or size has been changed since the last character message was
defined, a small window with the question "Use global character settings?" will
appear. Typing "Y" or clicking on "Yes" will cause the set and size currently named
on the screen to be used for the present message. Typing "N" or clicking on "No"
will cause the set and size last used for a character message to be used for the
present message also.
For ASCII character messages, simply type in the character from the keyboard.
For non-keyboard ASCII characters, hold down the "Alt" key and type in the
decimal equivalent of the ASCII code USING THE KEYPAD (see character set
Tab). Once the character appears, either press return or click directly on the
character. For Japanese, Korean or Special characters, hold down the "Alt" key
and type in the case sensitive Font ID using the keyboard and top row number keys
(NOT the keypad). Note that the Cap Lock key may not work on all computers. If
so, use the Shift key. Once the character appears, press return or click directly on
the character. Repeat the process for any remaining states. Once the proper
number of states is defined, press Esc.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 112 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Keyword messages will prompt for a selection from the keyword message file to
act as the first state message. The keyword message window will appear on the
screen. Note that only Section 0 of the keyword file (up to, but not including the first
occurrence of the word "KEYWORD") will appear in the scroll window. Once a first
state message has been highlighted, either press return or double click directly on
the message. Repeat the process for any remaining states. Once the proper
number of states is defined, press Esc. Note that if assigning keywords as "module
displayable messages," define ONLY state 1 of the message (to act as a pointer).
Text messages will prompt for a selection from the text message file to act as the
first state message. The text message window will appear on the screen. Once a
first state message has been highlighted, either press return or double click directly
on the message. Repeat the process for any remaining states. Once the proper
number of states is defined, press Esc. Note that if assigning text messages as
"module displayable messages," define ONLY state 1 of the message (to act as
a pointer).
Sprite messages will prompt for a selection from the sprite file to act as the first
state message. The sprite file window will appear on the screen. Once a first
message has been highlighted, either press return or double click directly on the
sprite name. Repeat the process for any remaining states. Once the proper
number of states is defined, press Esc. Note that if assigning sprite messages as
"module displayable messages," define ONLY state 1 of the message (to act as
a pointer).
Horizontal Size
Determines the horizontal component of the message area. Note that entry is
made in numbers of 8-pixel blocks. The program will automatically set this number
to a size which is adequate to display the largest message. Even though the size
can be changed, be careful to leave adequate room for the entire message.
Note that module ASCII string descriptors end with a number separated from the
rest of the descriptor by a comma. This number is the number of characters
contained in the ASCII string and dictates the minimum amount of space needed
to display the string (if the number has been left blank, the program will default to
a number which corresponds to 28 characters in length).
Vertical Size
Determines the vertical component of the message area. Note that entry is made
in numbers of 8-pixel blocks but must be made to equal a multiple of 16 (use even
numbers). The program will automatically set this number to a size which is
adequate to display the largest message. Even though the size can be changed,
be careful to leave adequate room for the entire message.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 113 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Setpoint
Value
Test 1
Control relays. . .
Messages. . .
sYstem commands
Incr/decr setpoint
sEcurity setpoint
Paths

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

System Command
Module type:
Descriptor:
Controller number:

Global 1

Card number:

Global 2

Security level:
Horizontal size:
Vertical size:
Accept

Cancel

(or Alt A) (or Alt C)

4.2.5 System Commands


A system command is a function which causes some action to occur at a system
software level. These functions are specifically defined and program to the screen
as an interactive area with momentary switch action. They are used to reset
communications, save setpoints, save hardware setups, etc..
Either type a "Y" or position the pointer over the words "System Commands" and
click or use the arrow keys to highlight "System Commands" and press return. The
cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area.
Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar. To position the
crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair on the editing area
(without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the crosshair (and press
return). "Snap" works with "System Commands."
Once the crosshair is clicked in (it marks the upper-left corner of the command
area), a window titled "System Command" will overlay the screen. The entries
made in this window are used to explicitly define the command being placed.
Every item appearing in the window will require an entry. Valid choices for an item
will be displayed in an overlay. Some entries may fill in automatically, depending
on a choice made for a previous item. Warnings or cautions may appear,
depending on the item or attempted entry to that item.
The program will sequence through the entry items. The underline cursor (in white)
acts as a pointer. Either double click on the item or press return. In most cases a
list of valid choices will appear.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 114 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button (between the arrows) will scroll
the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way
and the middle of the list will show in the window). Or use the keypad to move
through the list. Page Down moves the display down one page; Page Up moves
the display up one page; End moves the display to the end of the list; Home moves
the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys move the highlighted area
one position in the direction of the arrow.
For items requiring numeric entries (size), double clicking or pressing return will
cause the white underline cursor to be replaced by a green underline cursor. Once
the green underline cursor appears, type in the correct number. Once an entry has
been made for each of the items, either "Accept" , "Cancel" or go back and edit the
entries. To accept, type "Alt A" or position the pointer over the word "Accept" and
click the mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of a particular
command. To cancel, type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word "Cancel"
and click the mouse. "Cancel" is used to abort the definition of a particular
command.
If a mistake has been made, position the underline cursor in the entry to be
changed. Either use the mouse (click anywhere within the entry) or use the arrow
keys. Once the (white) underline cursor is in the entry, either double click the
mouse or press return. Make whatever changes are necessary and either "Accept"
or "Cancel." Once "Accepted", the window will disappear and the system command area will be displayed on the screen as the inverse of whatever background
it occupies.
Once the first system command of an editing session has been placed on a screen,
each time the "System Command" window appears, it will appear with the
previously entered data on display. This allows for quick entry of similar system
commands.
Defining the System Command
Module Type
This is the broadest entry for the definition of a system command and determines
which list of descriptors will be displayed.
Descriptor
Determines a particular system command within a particular module type. Once
an entry is made for module type and descriptor, default settings appear in the
other entry items.
Controller Number
Identifies which controller (of ALL attached to a single operator station) this system
command resides in.
Global 1
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL system
commands FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the
same controller number that appears in the controller number box. ("Global 1" is
especially helpful on systems with multiple control racks).
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 115 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Card Number
Identifies which card of a particular module type (within a particular controller) this
system command resides in (e.g., the first or second temperature board).
Global 2
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL system
commands FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the
same card number that appears in the card number box. ("Global 2" is especially
helpful on systems with multiple cards of the same function).
Security Level
Determines the minimum security level necessary in order to invoke this command. Total range is 1 - 4.
Horizontal Size
Determines the horizontal component of the interactive area of the system
command. Note that entry is made in numbers of 8-pixel blocks.
Vertical Size
Determines the vertical component of the interactive area of the system command. Note that entry is made in numbers of 8-pixel blocks but must be made to
equal a multiple of 16 (use even numbers).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 116 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Setpoint
Value
Test 1
Control relays. . .
Messages. . .
sYstem commands
Incr/decr setpoint
sEcurity setpoint
Increment Decrement Setpoint
Paths

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

Module type:
Descriptor:
Controller number:

Global 1

Card number:

Global 2

Integer digits:

Refer to the Text Files


supplied on the
Modfile disk.

Fractional digits:
High limit:
Low limit:
Power-up:
Security level:

Print the text files


as a reference for
definitions and limits.

Recipe dependent:
Machine dependent:
Action:
Wrap:

See Installation Procedure.

Horizontal size:
Vertical size:
Accept

Cancel

(or Alt A) (or Alt C)

4.2.6 Increment/Decrement Setpoint


An increment/decrement function is a special function for use with setpoints (any
setpoint can use the increment/decrement function) which allows a setpoint to be
increased or decreased by selecting an interactive area on the screen. Note that
the entire setpoint is defined here, but this function places only the interactive area
on the screen (not the setpoint itself). If the increment/decrement function is
programmed to a screen, selecting the interactive area and pressing the "Enter"
key will cause the setpoint to increas or decrease, depending on how the area was
defined. The numeric setpoint (or messages of some sort) can be programmed to
the same screen to show the change to the setpoint.
Either type an "I" or position the pointer over the words "Incr/Decr Setpoint" and
release or use the arrow keys to highlight "Incr/Decr Setpoint" and press return.
The cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing
area. Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar. To position
the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair on the editing
area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the crosshair (and press
return). "Snap" does function with "Incr/Decr."
Once the crosshair is clicked in (it marks the upper-left corner of the incr/decr
setpoint area), a window titled "Increment Decrement Setpoint" will overlay the
screen. The entries made in this window are used to define the incr/decr setpoint
function being placed.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 117 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Every item appearing in the window will require an entry. Some may not be "user
editable." Valid choices for an item will be displayed in an overlay. Some entries
may fill in automatically, depending on a choice made for a previous item. Changes
"may impact other occurrences" of the element. Other warnings or cautions may
appear, depending on the item or attempted entry to that item. The program will
sequence through the entry items. The underline cursor (in white) acts as a pointer.
Either double click on the item or press return. A list of valid choices will appear.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button (between the arrows) will scroll
the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way
and the middle of the list will show in the window). Or use the keypad to move
through the list. Page Down moves the display down one page; Page Up moves
the display up one page; End moves the display to the end of the list; Home moves
the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys move the highlighted area
one position in the direction of the arrow.
For items requiring multi-digit numeric entries (upper limit, lower limit, power-up,
etc.), double clicking or pressing return will cause the white underline cursor to be
replaced by a green underline cursor. Once the green underline cursor appears,
type in the correct number. A minus sign must be used for negative numbers.
Negative numbers can only be used with bipolar setpoints (see modfile printout).
Unsigned numbers will be treated as positive numbers. Once an entry has been
made for each of the items, either "Accept" , "Cancel" or go back and edit the
entries. To accept, type "Alt A" or position the pointer over the word "Accept" and
click the mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of a particular function.
To cancel, type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word "Cancel" and click the
mouse. "Cancel" is used to abort the definition of a particular function.
If a mistake has been made, position the underline cursor in the entry to be
changed. Either use the mouse (click anywhere within the entry) or use the arrow
keys. Once the (white) underline cursor is in the entry, either double click the
mouse or press return. Make whatever changes are necessary and either "Accept"
or "Cancel." Once "Accepted", the window will disappear and the interactive area
will be displayed on the screen as the inverse of whatever background it occupies.
Once the first incr/decr setpoint of a session has been placed on a screen, each
time the "Increment Decrement Setpoint" window appears, it will appear with the
previously entered data on display. This allows for quick entry of similar functions.

Note that the Incr/Decr Setpoint function contains the complete setpoint
definition as well as the increment/decrement information. Changes made
to the setpoint info will cause changes at other occurrences of the setpoint!
Defining the Increment/Decrement Function
The "Modfile" definition of the setpoint is what determines the limits of the window
entries. If a setpoint has been defined as not "user editable", the entries which first
appear cannot be changed (see the README file on the modfile disk for what
defines a setpoint).
Module Type
This is the broadest entry for the definition of a setpoint and determines which list
of descriptors is displayed.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 118 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Descriptor
Determines a particular setpoint within a particular module type. Once an entry is
made for module type and descriptor, default settings appear in the other entries.
Controller Number
Identifies which controller (of ALL attached to a single operator station) the setpoint
resides in.
Global 1
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL setpoints
FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the same
controller number that appears in the controller number box. ("Global 1" is
especially helpful on systems with multiple control racks).
Card Number
Identifies which card of a particular module type (within a particular controller) the
setpoint resides in (e.g., the first or second temperature board).
Global 2
"Xing" this box (after the other entries have been made) will cause ALL setpoints
FROM THIS SAME MODFILE currently on this screen to assume the same card
number that appears in the card number box. ("Global 2" is especially helpful on
systems with multiple cards of the same function).
Integer Digits
Determines the number of whole number (to the left of the decimal point) digits to
be displayed. This entry can be from a minimum of one (1) to a maximum of five
(5). The total number of digits (integer plus fractional) cannot exceed five (5).
Fractional Digits
Determines the number of fractional number (to the right of the decimal point) digits
to be displayed. This entry can be from a minimum of zero (0) to a maximum of four
(4). The total number of digits (integer plus fractional) cannot exceed five (5). Note
that the number of fractional digits may have been fixed in the modfile (see modfile
text printout).
High Limit
Determines the highest possible setting for this increment or decrement function.
The limit for this entry is fixed in the modfile, but it may be further constrained here.
The highest possible limit for a unipolar setpoint is 65535. The highest possible
limit for a bipolar setpoint is 32767 (see modfile text printout).
Low Limit
Determines the lowest possible setting for this increment or decrement function.
The limit for this entry is fixed in the modfile, but it may be further constrained here.
The lowest possible limit for a unipolar setpoint is zero (0). The lowest possible limit
for a bipolar setpoint is -32768 (see modfile text printout).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 119 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Power-up
Determines the power-up setting of this setpoint. Note that the ability to make or
change an entry here is determined in the modfile (see modfile printout).
Security Level
Determines the minimum security necessary in order to change this setpoint. Total
range is 1 - 4, but minimum is determined in modfile (see modfile printout).
Recipe Dependent
Determines whether this setpoint will be recipe dependent or not. A "Y" entry
means that when a "Copy Recipe" is performed, this setpoint's setting will be
copied. This entry may have been fixed by the modfile. Note that a setpoint may
be either recipe dependent, or machine dependent, or both, or neither.
Machine Dependent
Determines whether this setpoint will be machine dependent or not. A "Y" entry
means that when a "Copy Insta-Set" is performed, this setpoint's setting will be
copied. This entry may have been fixed by the modfile. Note that a setpoint may
be either recipe dependent, or machine dependent, or both, or neither.
Action
Determines whether the interactive area being defined will cause the setpoint to
increment or decrement.
Wrap
Determines what occurs to the setpoint once it goes beyond its high or low limit.
With wrap enabled, once the setpoint goes beyond its high limit it will wrap to its
low limit. With wrap enabled, once the setpoint goes beyond its low limit it will wrap
to its high limit. With wrap disabled, decrementing stops at the low limit and
incrementing stops at the high limit.
Horizontal Size
Determines the horizontal component of the interactive Inc/Dec area. Note that
entry is made in numbers of 8-pixel blocks.
Vertical Size
Determines the vertical component of the interactive Inc/Dec area. Note that entry
is made in numbers of 8-pixel blocks but must be made to equal a multiple of 16
(use even numbers).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 120 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Setpoint
Value
Test 1
Control relays. . .
Messages. . .
sYstem commands
Incr/decr setpoint
sEcurity setpoint
Paths

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

4.2.7 Security Setpoint


The "Security Setpoint" area is the area that, during operation, must be selected
in order to enter a security code (and thus change the security level).
During controller operation, don't be misled by the fact that this area appears only
as a single digit. When entering the setpoint, enter the entire security code.
Either type an "E" or position the pointer over the words "Security Setpoint" and
release or use the arrow keys to highlight "Security Setpoint" and press return. The
cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area.
Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar. To position the
crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair on the editing area
(without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the crosshair (and press
return). "Snap" will function with "Security Setpoint."

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 121 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Setpoint
Value
Test 1
Control relays. . .
Messages. . .
sYstem commands
Incr/decr setpoint
sEcurity setpoint
Paths

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

4.2.8 Paths
A "Path" is an interactive area containing a screen title. During operation,
highlighting this area and pressing "Enter" will cause the operator station to display
the screen named in the "Path."
Either type a "P" or position the pointer over the word "Paths" and release or use
the arrow keys to highlight "Paths" and press return. The cursor will change from
an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area. Cursor location will be
displayed on the right side of the menu bar. To position the crosshair, click in at the
exact location or just place the crosshair on the editing area (without clicking in) and
use the arrow keys to move the crosshair (and press return). "Snap" functions with
"Paths." Note that this menu item is used for placing "on-screen" paths, as
opposed to "softkey" paths. Refer to the Softkey menu to program softkey paths.
Once a position has been selected, a list of the available screens will appear (all
of the screens in the application). Once a screen name is highlighted, double click
on the highlighted area or press return. The window containing the list of screens
will disappear and the highlighted screen name will appear on the screen. The
entire screen name rectangle will be "interactive" so that during operation, when
this area is selected, the operator station will "path" to the screen named.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 122 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Line
graph
Image:
Screen
Bar graphTest 1
SPC graph
Profile

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

Linegraph
Large

Linegraph Size:
Origin Location:

Accept

Cancel

Edit cfg

(or Alt A) (or Alt C) (or Alt E)

4.3 Graphs (n/a for Sprites)


Select the graph menu by typing "G" or positioning the pointer over the top of the
word "Graph" and pressing (and holding) the left mouse button. The word "Graph"
will highlight and the menu will extend downward. If an item is followed by an
ellipsis, a further decision is necessary. To make a selection from within the menu,
either type the highlighted letter within the menu item or position the pointer (now
a small hand) over the item (and release the mouse button) or use the Up and Down
arrow keys to highlight an item (and press return).
4.3.1 Line Graphs
A line graph is a graphic function which allows the plotting of a specific group of
setpoints and values for visual comparison of results versus expectations.
Either type an "L" or position the pointer over the words "Line graph" and release
the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Line graph" and press return.
The cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing
area. Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar. To position
the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair on the editing
area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the crosshair (and press
return). "Snap" functions with "Line graph."
Once the crosshair is clicked in (it marks the upper-left corner of the linegraph
template), a window titled "Linegraph" will overlay the screen. The only entry
required determines whether the origin of the line graph is located to the left or the
right side of the graph template. Once an entry is made, either "Accept" or "Cancel."
To accept, type "Alt A" or position the pointer over the word "Accept" and click the
mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of a line graph template. To
cancel, type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word "Cancel" and click the
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 123 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


+XXX.XX

HOLD GRAPHS
mmmmmmmmmm

12

+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX

SAMPLE
PHASE
m

+XX.X
+X

+XXX.XX

FILL

+XXX.XX

7 (11)

+XXX.XX

+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX

11
1
2
3
4

SCALE
MIN
MAX
+XXX.XX +XXX.XX
+XXX.XX +XXX.XX
+XXX.XX +XXX.XX
+XXX.XX +XXX.XX

+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX

2 (4)

3 (4)
9

mmmmmmm
mmmmmmm
mmmmmmm
mmmmmmm
+XX +XXX.XX mm +XX +XXX.XX mm +XX +XXX.XX mm +XX +XXX.XX mm
P O S +XX.XXX

V E L +XX.XXX

Clamp

5 (etc.)

Eject

P R +XXXXX
Injection

+XXX

O U T P U T XXX.XX FILL +XXX.XX


GRAPH
SETUP

CURSOR
LEFT

CURSOR
RIGHT

10

Standard Line Graph Screen (not to scale)

mouse. "Cancel" is used to abort the definition of a line graph template. Once
"Accepted", the window will disappear and the line graph template will appear in
place on the screen.

Note that in addition to placing the Line graph template, it may be necessary
to redefine functions to be graphed (using the "Linegraph Configuration
Editor" see below).
Completing a Line Graph Screen
Although placing a line graph template is straightforward and easy to accomplish,
creating a complete, functioning line graph screen is somewhat more complicated.
A brief explanation of the necessary dynamic elements is included here. For a
detailed explanation of line graphs, refer to the "Setup" portion of the operator
station manual. It is also possible to gain a better understanding of line graphs (or
any other function) by printing out (using the "Report Generator") and studying the
standard screens containing those functions.
The standard line graph screen provided with the editor can be used "as is" with
most applications. For minor differences, it is easiest to just edit the standard
screen. Refer to the line graph screen shown above. Note that the drawing is not
to scale (some items appear in a different location than on the actual screen).

Note that the location of the Line graph function is dependent on software versions.
4000 Series Controllers with Data Handler Software Version 20.01 or earlier;
and Hydraulic Software Version 3.00 or earlier:

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 124 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

LINE GRAPH CHANNEL:


0 = DISABLED
1 = VELOCITY SETPOINTS
2 = PRESSURE SETPOINTS
3 = RAM PRESSURE VALUE
4 = CLAMP PRESSURE VALUE
5 = RAM VELOCITY VALUE
6 = RAM POSITION VALUE
7 = CLAMP POSITION VALUE
8 = EJECTOR POSITION VALUE
9 = TACH RPM VALUE
1 0 = PID OUTPUT
1 1 = ANALOG OUTPUT 1
1 2 = ANALOG OUTPUT 2
1 3 = ANALOG OUTPUT 3
1 4 = ANALOG OUTPUT 4
1 5 = SCREW SPEED PID OUTPUT
Clamp

Eject

LINE GRAPH PHASE:


0 = POSITION BASED, INJECTION
1 = TIME BASED
2 = POSITION BASED, RECOVERY

Barber-Colman

Cursor Select Key


EL Operator Stations,
V3.00 or greater
Display Processor

Injection

LINE
GRAPHS

Standard Line Graph Setup Screen V03.00 or earlier Hydraulics


(this screen contains NO dynamic elements)

The setpoints which determine the functions to be graphed (1) are part of the
hydraulics modfile (Line Graph Channel Select 1-4). Module displayable messages from the hydraulics modfile (Line Graph Channel Select 1-4) show the name
of the 15 possible graph functions (2) as well as the units of the graph function (3).
As the setpoint increments or decrements, the module displayable message
changes also. Note that the graph setup screen contains a complete list of the
setpoints and functions.
"Sample" and "Phase" (mode)(4) are hydraulic setpoints as well. "Sample"
determines the time period displayed on the graph (for time based graphs) and
"Phase" determines whether the graph is time based or position based. The graph
setup screen also contains a list of the valid entries for "Phase."
4000 and 6000 Series Controllers with Data Handler Software Version 20.02 or
later; and Hydraulic Software Version 3.01 or later; (and any released version of
Parison software, if applicable):
The setpoints which determine the functions to be graphed (1) are part of the data
handler modfile (Line Graph Select 1-4). Module displayable messages from the
data handler modfile show the name (Line Graph Sel Msg #1-#4) of the 75 possible
graph functions (2) as well as the units (Line Graph Units Msg #1-#4) of the graph
function(3). As the setpoint increments or decrements, the module displayable
message changes also.
Note that setpoints, values and system/status CRs from both the parison and
hydraulics modfile can be graphed (the 75 possible choices are programmed at
screen editing time see Line graphs, Edit cfg.).
"Sample" and "Phase" (mode)(4) are data handler setpoints as well. "Sample"
determines the time period displayed on the graph (for time based graphs) and
"Phase" determines whether the graph is time based or position based (0= Position
Based, Injection; 1= Time Based; 3= Position Based, Recovery).
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 125 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


(The following functions are common to both versions described previously:)
Non-graphed hydraulic values (5) appear below the graph (POS, VEL, etc.)
The value of the graphed functions (6) (at the cursor location) is displayed using
display processor values (Linegraph X Data). Additional display processor values
are used to show the Y-axis scale values (7).
The scale values displayed along the Y-axis are determined by the entry to the
display processor setpoints for MIN and MAX (8) of Graph 1 (LG limits chan 1 min.
and LG limits chan 1 max.).
Cursor location is displayed (9) using a display processor value (Linegraph Cursor,
fixed).
Cursor location is controlled (10) using display processor system commands
(Move LG Cursor Right and Move LG Cursor Left).
The control relay labeled "Fill" (11) is a display processor control relay (Fill
Linegraph Channel 1).
The "Hold Graphs" function (12) is a system command from the data handler
modfile (PC Line graph Freeze).
Note the four line segments located just below the actual graph area (near the Xaxis). These lines have been painstakingly programmed to the screen in order to
help identify the four possible separate line graphs. Graph 1 will graph as a one
pixel wide solid line. Graph 2 will graph as a two pixel wide dashed (one pixel on,
one off) line. Graph 3 will graph as a one pixel wide dashed (two pixels on, two
pixels off) line. Graph 4 will graph as a two pixel wide dashed (two pixels on, two
pixels off) line.

Graph 1
Graph 2
Graph 3
Graph 4

With EL operator station software Version 3.00 or greater, the "cursor select" key
can be used to enable the cursor. Press the "cursor select" key and a graphic
symbol of a key will appear in the lower left corner of the display. The left or right
cursor keys can now be used to move the cursor on the line graph screen. The
movement will "auto-scroll" if the cursor key is held down. Press the "cursor select"
key a second time to disable the cursor.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 126 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Toolbox

Line
graph
Image:
Screen
Bar graphTest 1
SPC graph
Profile

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

Linegraph
Large

Linegraph Size:
Origin Location:

Accept

Cancel

Edit cfg
Linegraph Configuration Editor

Number:
Element type:
Descriptor:
Message Index:
Units index:
preV

Next

Clear

Done

nEw

(or Alt V) (or Alt N) (or Alt C) (or Alt D) (or Alt E
4.3.1.1 Line Graph Configuration Editor
Because numbers, descriptors and indexes must be in agreement, it is best to
prepare a numbered list of descriptors beforehand, along with a list of messages
which describe them (within the available space) and their units, then edit the
message file, and then edit this configuration file.
With the "Linegraph" window displayed, either type "Alt E" or position the pointer
over the button labeled "Edit cfg" and click the mouse. A second window titled
"Linegraph Configuration Editor" will overlay the first window. The window contains five entry items.
Number
Identifies which of the 75 possible (0-74) linegraph variables is being defined.
Enter a number from the keyboard, use "preV, " "Next" or "nEw" to increment or
decrement the number. Note that zero (0) must be defined as "disabled" with an
"off-state" message.
Element Type
Determines whether the variable is a Setpoint, Value or System/Status Control
Relay. Once a choice is made here, a window with the respective title will overlay
the screen (refer to Control Functions for the definition of these elements. If the
specific element to be graphed occurs elsewhere in the screen set, make certain
that each of the separate definitions agree. Note that the configuration editor does
not restrict the modfile from which these choices can be made. However, the only
valid choices (that will actually graph) are from the hydraulics or parison modfiles.
Future releases of additional modfiles will support this function.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 127 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Message Index
Determines which message (from the message file) will be displayed in the area
assigned to Line Graph Sel Msg 1-4 (V20.01 or later Data Handler) or Line Graph
Channel Select 1-4 (V03.00 or earlier Hydraulics).
Units Index
Determines which message (from the message file) will be displayed in the area
assigned to Line Graph Units Msg 1-4 (V20.01 or later Data Handler) or Line Graph
Channel Select 1-4 (V03.00 or earlier Hydraulics).
The Buttons
Clicking on "preV" or typing "Alt V" will cause number to decrement.
Clicking on "Next" or typing "Alt N" will cause number to increment.
Clicking on "Clear" or typing "Alt C" will cause the entries presently in the window
to be cleared and all following elements to be moved up one position.
Clicking on "Done" or typing "Alt D" will cause the configuration editor to close.
Clicking on "nEw" or typing "Alt E" will cause number to increment and a blank
configuration to be placed at that position. Note that if "nEw" is performed at the
end of the file, it will add an element to the end of the file. If "nEw" is performed in
the middle of the file, all of the following elements will be pushed out one position.

Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Line
graph
Image:
Screen
Bar graphTest 1
SPC graph
Profile

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

Bargraph
Type:
Source 1:
Source 2:
High end of scale:
Low end of scale:
Orientation:
Security level:
Horizontal size:
Vertical size:
Origin:
Sprite enable:
Sprite index:
Clip enable:
Accept

Cancel

(or Alt A) (or Alt C)


1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 128 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


4.3.2 Bar Graphs
A bar graph is a graph function which uses parallel bars of varying length to
illustrate comparative values.
Either type a "B" or position the pointer over the words "Bar graph" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Bar graph" and press return. The
cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area.
Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar.
To position the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair
on the editing area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the
crosshair (and press return). "Snap" functions with "Bar graph." Once the crosshair
is clicked in (it marks the upper-left corner of a process bar graph; or the middleleft of a deviation bar graph), a window titled "Bargraph" will overlay the screen.
The entries made in this and the subsequent windows are used to explicitly define
the bar graph being placed. Every item appearing in the window will require an
entry. Some may not be "user editable." Valid choices for an item will be displayed
in an overlay. Some entries may fill in automatically, depending on a choice made
for a previous item. Other warnings or cautions may appear, depending on the item
or attempted entry to that item.
The program will sequence through the entry items. The underline cursor (in white)
acts as a pointer. Either double click on the item or press return. In most cases a
list of valid choices will appear.
Use the mouse (click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the
window. Clicking on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Dragging the button (between the arrows) will scroll
the window proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way
and the middle of the list will show in the window). Or use the keypad to move
through the list. Page Down moves the display down one page; Page Up moves
the display up one page; End moves the display to the end of the list; Home moves
the display to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys move the highlighted area
one position in the direction of the arrow.
For items requiring multi-digit numeric entries (upper limit, lower limit, power-up,
etc.), double clicking or pressing return will cause the white underline cursor to be
replaced by a green underline cursor. Once the green underline cursor appears,
type in the correct number. A minus sign must be used for negative numbers.
Negative numbers can only be used with bipolar setpoints (see modfile printouts).
Unsigned numbers will be treated as positive numbers. Once an entry has been
made for each of the items, either "Accept", "Cancel" or go back and edit the
entries. To accept, type "Alt A" or position the pointer over the word "Accept" and
click the mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of a particular function.
To cancel, type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word "Cancel" and click the
mouse. "Cancel" is used to abort the definition of a particular function.
If a mistake has been made, position the underline cursor in the entry to be
changed. Either use the mouse (click anywhere within the entry) or use the arrow
keys. Once the (white) underline cursor is in the entry, either double click the
mouse or press return. Make whatever changes are necessary and either "Accept"
or "Cancel." Once "Accepted", the window will disappear and the bar graph will be
displayed as an illuminated bar.
Once the first bar graph of an editing session has been placed on a screen, each
time the "Bar graph" window (or "Setpoint" or "Value" window) appears, it will
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 129 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


appear with the previously entered data on display. This allows for quick entry of
similar functions.
Note that the Bargraph Setpoint and Value functions contain the complete setpoint
or value definition as well as the bar graph information.

Changes made to the bar graph info will cause changes at other occurrences of
the setpoint or value!
Defining a Bar Graph
The "Modfile" definition of the setpoints and values used to create a bar graph
determine the limits of the window entries (see the README file on the modfile disk
for what defines a setpoint or value in the modfile).
Type
This is the broadest entry for the definition of a bar graph. There are two choices:
Process: a process bar graph is a graph of either a setpoint or a value on some
absolute scale determined in the bar graph definition.
Deviation: a deviation bar graph is a graph of the difference of either a setpoint
or a value from another setpoint or value identified in the bar graph definition.
Source 1
Depends on the "Type" of bar graph:
For "Process" Type bar graphs, Source 1 is the function (setpoint or value) to be
graphed. For "Deviation" Type bar graphs, Source 1 identifies the function
(setpoint or value) that Source 2 varies from.
Once setpoint or value is chosen, a window with the respective title will overlay the
screen (refer to Control Functions). If the setpoint or value to be graphed occurs
elsewhere in the screen set, make certain that each of the separate definitions
agree. Note that a setpoint used in a bar graph cannot be changed directly from
the graph. The setpoint can be added to the screen (any screen) as a "normal"
setpoint. Changes to the "normal" setpoint will then be reflected on the bar graph.
Source 2
(Deviation Type Bar Graphs Only!) Identifies the function (setpoint or value) to be
graphed. Once setpoint or value is chosen, a window with the respective title will
overlay the screen (refer to Control Functions). If the setpoint or value to be
graphed occurs elsewhere in the screen set, make certain that each of the
separate definitions agree.
Note that a setpoint used in a bar graph cannot be changed directly from the graph.
The setpoint can be added to the screen (any screen) as a "normal" setpoint.
Changes to the "normal" setpoint will then be reflected on the bar graph.
High End of Scale
Determines the highest setting or value that could appear on the graph (can be less
than or greater than the actual high limit of the setpoint or value). High and Low End
of Scale, along with Size, determine the resolution of the bar graph.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 130 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Click mouse button on
sprite at location
of process line.

The sprite would move up and down


on this line in a vertical bar graph.

Ok

Bar graph area defined by


horizontal and vertical size
(small rectangle).

Ok

Extended Bar graph area


caused by addition of sprite
(large rectangle).
"Clip" enabled

The sprite would move left and right


on this line in a horizontal bar graph.
Assigning a Sprite to a Bar Graph

Low End of Scale


Determines the lowest setting or value that could appear on the graph (can be less
than or greater than the actual low limit of the setpoint or value). High and Low End
of Scale, along with Size, determine the resolution of the bar graph.
Orientation
Vertical or Horizontal.
Security Level
(For future use.) Determines the minimum security necessary in order to change
a setpoint directly from the bar graph. For the present, make certain this security
level matches the security level of any setpoint(s) used as Source 1 or Source 2.
Horizontal Size
Determines the horizontal component of the bar graph. Note that entry is made in
numbers of 8-pixel blocks.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 131 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


mmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
+XX mmm
LAST

DISTRIBUTION CURVE
100

POINTS

TOTAL

HISTORY

X-bar
+XXX.XX
X-barbar +XXX.XX
R
+XXX.XX
R-bar
+XXX.XX
Std dev +XXX.XX
Cr
+XXX.XX
Cp
+XXX.XX
Cpk
XXX.XX
USL
LSL

+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX

LCL
+XXX.XX

SPC
Selection

UCL
+XXX.XX

SPC
Setup

X-BAR
Values

LCL
+XXX.XX

X-BAR
Chart

UCL
+XXX.XX

R
Chart

SPC
Graphs

Standard Distribution Curve Bar Graph Screen

Vertical Size
Determines the vertical component of the bar graph. Entry is made in numbers of
8-pixel blocks but must be made to equal a multiple of 16 (use even numbers).
Origin
Left or Right for Horizontal; Top or Bottom for Vertical.
Sprite Enable
Determines whether or not a Sprite can be attached to this bar graph.
Sprite index
Determines which specific sprite will be attached to this bar graph. The sprite file
window will appear on the screen. Once a sprite has been highlighted, either press
return or double click directly on the sprite name. A small window will appear with
the prompt "Click mouse button on sprite at location of process line." Once the
prompt is acknowledged, a small window containing the sprite will appear. The
cursor will be a crosshair. This point establishes where the sprite attaches itself to
the bar graph (see diagrams above). Click the crosshair at the chosen point and
acknowledge.
Clip Enable
Determines whether or not the sprite will be "clipped" to fit within the area defined
by the horizontal and vertical size (see diagram above). With clip disabled (the
default setting), the bar graph area will be increased to allow the entire sprite to be
displayed along the entire horizontal and vertical length of the bar graph.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 132 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Completing a Bar Graph Screen
Although placing a single bar graph on a screen is easy to accomplish, creating a
complete, functioning bar graph screen is somewhat more complicated. An
explanation of the dynamic elements used to create the "Distribution Curve"
screen of the standard screen set is included here. For a detailed explanation of
the screen, refer to the "Setup" portion of the controller's instruction manual. It is
also possible to gain a better understanding of bar graphs (or any other function)
by printing out (using the "Report Generator") and studying the standard screens
containing those functions.
The standard distribution curve bar graph screen can be used "as is" with most
applications. For minor differences, it is easiest to just edit the standard screen.
Note that all of the elements on this screen are contained in the "Data Handler"
modfile. Note that many of the values used here are computed from data contained
on other screens in the system.
The graphed variable is chosen by incrementing/decrementing the "Displayed
Variable" setpoint (upper left of the screen). As the setpoint is changed, the module
ASCII string message above it will also change. The variables to be graphed (as
well as the descriptive string) are selected using the "Edit cfg" function in the "SPC
Graph" window of the screen editor. The values along the left side of the screen,
as well as "LCL" and "UCL", are the "Displayed" version of that particular value (see
the modfile printouts).
The distribution curves are created using two groups of twenty individual bar
graphs. Each of the bar graphs included in the curve labeled "Last 100 Points" is
a graph of an individual value computed by the "Data Handler" software (SPC 100
pt Distrib #1 through SPC 100 pt Distrib #20). The values assigned to each of the
twenty bar graphs MUST be in ascending numerical order (1-20) and MUST be
placed on the screen in ascending numerical order from left to right.
Bar graphs 1 through 4 will graph all data below the lower control limit (LCL).
Bar graphs 5 through 10 will graph all data above the LCL but below the nominal.
Bar graphs 11 through 16 will graph all data above the nominal but below the upper
control limit (UCL).
Bar graphs 17 thorugh 20 will graph all data above the upper control limit.
"Total History" is similar in nature, except for the fact that it is composed of twenty
different values (SPC Total History Di #1 through SPC Total History Di #20).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 133 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Line
graph
Image:
Screen
Bar graphTest 1
SPC graph
Profile

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

SPC / Trending Graph


SPC / Trending Graph Size:
SPC / Trending Graph Type:

Accept

Cancel

Edit cfg

(or Alt A)

(or Alt C)

(or Alt E)

4.3.3 SPC Graphs


Statistical Process Control (SPC) is a software option to the MACO control system.
Any process value from the system can be selected as an SPC parameter. The
software will calculate and display a number of process parameters. The graph
screens described here are used to display that process information.
Either type an "S" or position the pointer over the words "SPC graph" and release
the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "SPC graph" and press return.
The cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing
area. Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar. To position
the crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair on the editing
area (without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the crosshair (and press
return). "Snap" functions with "SPC graph."
Once the crosshair is clicked in (it marks the upper-left corner of the SPC graph
template), a window titled "SPC / Trending Graph" will overlay the screen. The only
two entries required to define the SPC graph template are "Size" and "Type." "Size"
determines whether the graph is small or large. Two small graphs can be placed
on a single screen. "Type" determines whether the graph is a graph of the X-bar
values or R values.
Once an entry is made for each of the two items, either "Accept" or "Cancel." To
accept, type "Alt A" or position the pointer over the word "Accept" and click the
mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of an SPC graph template. To
cancel, type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word "Cancel" and click the
mouse. "Cancel" is used to abort the definition of an SPC graph template. Once
"Accepted", the window will disappear and the SPC graph template will appear on
the screen.

Note that in addition to placing the SPC graph template, it may be necessary
to redefine the functions to be graphed (using the "SPC Configuration
Editor" - see below).
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 134 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Completing an SPC Graph Screen
Although placing an SPC graph template is straightforward and easy to accomplish, creating a complete, functioning SPC graph screen is somewhat complicated. An explanation of the dynamic elements used to create the "SPC Graphs"
screen of the standard screen set is included here. For a detailed explanation of
SPC graphs, refer to the "Setup" portion of the operator station manual. It is also
possible to gain a better understanding of SPC graphs (or any other function) by
printing (using "Report Generator") and studying the standard screens containing
those functions.
The standard SPC graph screen provided with the editor can be used "as is" with
most applications. For minor differences, it is easiest to just edit the standard
screen. Refer to the SPC graph screen shown at the top of this page. This screen
shows a small X-bar graph at the top and a small R graph at the bottom. All of the
elements shown on the screen (with the exception of the scale values along the
Y-axis) are contained in the "Data Handler" modfile. Note that many of the values
used here are computed from data contained on other screens.
The graphed variable is chosen by incrementing/decrementing the "Displayed
Variable" setpoint (lower left of screen). As the setpoint is changed, the module
ASCII string messages also change. The variables to be graphed (as well as the
descriptive strings) are selected using the SPC "Edit cfg" function.
The scale of each of the Y-axes is determined by the setpoints (X-bar Scale Min.
and X-bar Scale Max.; Range Scale Min. and Range Scale Max.) appearing at the
top and bottom left side of each graph.
The values in between the scale setpoints are located in the "Display Processor"
modfile (SPC XBAR chart Y data 1 through 11; SPC R chart Y data 1 through 11).
Note that for small graphs only four of the eleven values
are placed on the screen (Numbers 3, 5, 7 and 9, bottom to top) of each of the
respective values. A large graph would use all eleven values (1 at the bottom; 11
at the top) along the Y-axis.
The values along the right side of the screen are the "Displayed" version of that
particular value (see the "Data Handler" modfile printouts).
The "time stamp" at intervals of 10 along the X-axes is provided by "Data Handler"
ASCII strings (Time at 0 through Time at 100).
4.3.3.1 SPC Configuration Editor
With the "SPC Trending Graph" window displayed, either type "Alt E" or position
the pointer over the button labeled "Edit cfg" and click mouse. A second window
titled "SPC Configuration Editor" will overlay the first window. The entries made in
this window are used to define the thirty possible SPC variables. The window
contains three entry items.
Use the Up and Down arrow keys or the mouse to position the white underline
cursor in the chosen entry item. Once located, either press return or double click
the mouse so that the green underline cursor appears.
Number
Identifies which of the 30 possible SPC variables is being defined. Enter a number
from the keyboard or use "Prev" or "Next" to increment or decrement the number.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 135 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


SPC GRAPH
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX

LCL

X-bar
+XXX.XX
X-barbar +XXX.XX
R
+XXX.XX
R-bar
+XXX.XX

UCL

Std dev +XXX.XX


Cr
+XXX.XX
Cp
+XXX.XX
Cpk
XXX.XX

UCL
X

+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX

1 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 100
mmmm
mmmm mmmm mmmm mmmm
mmmm
mmmm
mmmm mmmm mmmm mmmm

+XX

USL
LSL

+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX

UCLX
LCLX
UCLR
LCLR

+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX
+XXX.XX

mmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
mmm
SPC
Selection

SPC
Setup

X-BAR
Values

X-BAR
Chart

R
Chart

Dist
Curve

Standard X-Bar and R (SPC Graphs) Screen

Element Type
Determines whether this variable is a setpoint or value. Once either setpoint or
value is chosen, a window with the respective title will overlay the screen (refer to
Control Functions). If the setpoint or value to be graphed occurs elsewhere in the
screen set, make certain that each of the separate definitions agree.
Descriptor
Determines the character string used to describe the variable. Ten of the thirty
possible variables can be selected to appear on an "active" list of SPC variables
for graphing. The descriptors of these ten variables will be available for display as
"Data Handler" ASCII strings (SPC Variable Selection #1 through #10). Refer to
"SPC Selection" in the "Setup" portion of the operators manual).
Clicking on Next or typing "Alt N" will cause "Number" to increment.
Clicking on preV or typing "Alt V" will cause "Number" to decrement.
Clicking on Clear or typing "Alt C" will cause "Element Type" and "Descriptor" to
be cleared (for the displayed number only).
Clicking on Done or typing "Alt D" will close the "SPC Configuration Editor" window.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 136 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Toolbox

Line
graph
Image:
Screen
Bar graphTest 1
SPC graph
Profile

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

SPC / Trending Graph


SPC / Trending Graph Size:
SPC Configuration Editor

SPC / Trending Graph Type:


Number:

Accept

Cancel

Edit cfg

Element type:
Descriptor:
preV

Next

Clear

Done

(or Alt V) (or Alt N) (or Alt C) (or Alt D)

Creating an SPC Configuration File for use with an LCD Operator Station.
Statistical Process Control can be performed on a system which is equipped with
an LCD Operator Station. Graphs cannot be displayed, but data can be printed. At
this time OptiGrafix does not allow editing of the SPC Configuration file from the
LCD Editor, but there is a workaround. Do this:
A.

Create a "dummy" application with the EL User Editor.

B.

In the "dummy" application, open a "new" screen.

C.

Select SPC Graph under the Graph Menu.

D.

Click anywhere on the blank screen.

E.

Click on the "Edit Config" (and edit the config).

F.

Click on "Done" when finished editing.

G. Click on "Cancel" (the Config file will still be saved).

1640-IN-006-0-02

H.

Quit the screen editor (not necessary to save).

I.

Exit to DOS.

J.

DOS copy the SPC.CFG file from the "dummy" application into the proper
LCD User application.

K.

Open the LCD application and perform a "link current" operation.

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 137 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Line
graph
Image:
Screen
Bar graphTest 1
SPC graph
Profile

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

Profile
Profile Orientation:
Origin Location:

Accept

(or Alt A)

Cancel

(or Alt C)

Edit cfg

(or Alt E)

4.3.4 Profile Graphs


Profile graphs are used in blowmolding applications in order to help define the
weight and thickness (and ultimately the final shape) of the plastic being molded.
Either type a "P" or position the pointer over the word "Profile" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Profile" and press return. The
cursor will change from an arrow to a crosshair as it passes into the editing area.
Cursor location will be displayed on the right side of the menu bar. To position the
crosshair, click in at the exact location or just place the crosshair on the editing area
(without clicking in) and use the arrow keys to move the crosshair (and press
return). "Snap" functions with "Profile."
Once the crosshair is clicked in (it marks the upper-left corner of the profile
template), a window titled "Profile" will overlay the screen. The only two entries
required to define the profile template are"Profile orientation" (vertical or horizontal) and "Origin Location" (bottom or top for vertical; left or right for horizontal).
Once an entry is made for each of the two items, either "Accept" or "Cancel." To
accept, type "Alt A" or position the pointer over the word "Accept" and click the
mouse. "Accept" is used to complete the definition of a profile template. To cancel,
type "Alt C" or position the pointer over the word "Cancel" and click the mouse.
"Cancel" is used to abort the definition of a profile template. Once "Accepted", the
window will disappear and the profile template will appear on the screen.

Note that in addition to placing the profile template, it may be necessary to redefine
the functions to be graphed (using the "Profile Configuration Editor" - see below).
Completing a Profile Graph Screen
Although placing a profile template is straightforward and easy to accomplish,
creating a complete, functioning profile screen is somewhat complicated. An
explanation of the dynamic elements used to create the "Parison Profile" screen
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 138 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


20
6
8
4
10
21
3
13
12

MASTER
mmmm
WEIGHT
mmmm
REGION
mmmm
LOCK PNT
mmmm

17

100

Pos
Chan1
Active: + V V V + V V V . V V
Inactive: + V V V + V V V . V V

Inactive Cursor
Barber-Colman

Interpolation is
mmmmmmmmmmmmm

Region 4
Region 4

mmmmmmm
mmmmmmm
mmmmmmm
mmmmmmm
mmmmmmm
Region count

Cursor Select Key

Region 3
Region 3

Region 2
Region 2

+ S Cursor Mode
+ S S S . S S Step Size
+ S S Profile Number

16

Active Cursor

mmmmmmmmmm

Interpolation Mode
Rgn 5
Rgn 4
Rgn 3
Rgn 2
Rgn 1
+S

15

14

Region 1
Region 1

1
+SSS.SS

+SSS.SS

7
11

READ
PROFILE

SEND TO
PARISON

TOGGLE
LOCK PT

INTERPOLATE

TOGGLE
MASTER

TOGGLE
CURSOR

SHIFT
UP

SHIFT
DOWN

SHIFT
RIGHT

SHIFT
LEFT

CLEAR
PROFILE

PARISON
MENU

19

24

18

22

23

Note that there are additional profile functions that do not appear on
this screen refer to the Display Processor modfile.
of the standard screen set is included here. For a detailed explanation of profiles,
refer to the "Setup" portion of the operator station manual. It is also possible to gain
a better understanding of parison profiles by printing (using "Report Generator")
and studying the standard screens containing those functions.
The standard Parison Profile screen provided with the editor can be used "as is"
with most applications. For minor differences, it is easiest to just edit the standard
screen. Refer to the Parison Profile screen shown on the next page, which is similar
to the Parison Profile screen supplied with the standard screen set. Note that all
of the parison graph screen functions are part of the Display Processor Modfile.
The profile template (1) occupies the righthand side of the screen. All profiles
contain 100 setpoints. The scale of the profile display is controlled by the two
setpoints at the bottom of the template (2) ("PG limits chan 1 minimum" and "PG
limits chan 1 maximum"). A profile can be divided into as many as five different
regions by the "Region count" (3) ("Number of Regions") setpoint. The default
setting is one. All region boundaries and both end points are treated as "master
setpoints" (with the exception that the last point is not used for flat interpolations).
Region boundaries are displayed as a line across the graph. The boundaries can
be hidden (they will still exist as boundaries) from display by toggling the "Region
Marker Inhibit" CR (4). Region boundaries can be moved using the Increment/
Decrement Region boundaries (5) (Increment Region X Bound; Decrement
Region X Bound) system commands.
Master setpoints can be hidden from display (they will still be treated as masters)
by toggling the "Master Point Inhibit" CR (6). Masters are shown as lines across
the profile and also as small tick marks to the left (or bottom) of the profile where
the two cursors are located. Master setpoints can be added or deleted using the
"Toggle master point" (7) system command. The "Loop Weight" (a Parison module
setpoint) is displayed as a dashed line. This dashed line can be toggled on or off
using the "Weight Tracking Inhibit" CR (8). Points can be "locked" at their present
value (to be uneffected by interpolation) using the "Toggle lock point" system
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 139 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


command (9). Lock points can be hidden from display (they will still be locked) by
toggling the Lock Point Inhibit" CR (10).
There are two cursors available on the profile. The "active" cursor appears as a
solid triangle on two opposing sides of the graph. The "inactive" cursor appears as
a "home plate" on two opposing sides of the graph. In order to toggle between the
cursors, use the "Toggle Cursor" system command (11). In order to move the
cursor, press the "Cursor Control" key (below the arrow keys on the operator
station). A small key will appear in the lower left corner of the display. Once the key
is displayed, the active cursor can be moved using the arrow keys (along the proper
axis). Once the cursor is positioned, toggle the "Cursor Control" key off.
The arrow keys of the other axis are used to increase or decrease the profile. The
Step Size (12) ia determined by the "Inc/Dec Step Size" setpoint.
The Cursor mode (13) is determined by the "Cursor movement mode" setpoint.
The powerup setting is zero (0) and causes the cursor to advance by segment. An
entry of one (1) causes the cursor to advance by master and boundary segments.
The position of each of the two cursors is displayed using the "Active cursor
position" and "Inactive cursor position" values (14). The value of the graph at the
cursor positions is displayed using the "Parison Active data 1" and "Parison
Inactive data 1" values (15).
Profile Number (16) is the "Active profile" setpoint that determines which of the up
to 48 (0-47) profiles is displayed on the graph. Enter a known profile and then press
"Read Profile" (17) which is the "Read Profile From Module" system command.

Make certain the correct profile number is displayed BEFORE editing!


The entire profile can be shifted left or right (one segment at a time) using the "Shift
profile left" or "Shift profile right" system commands (18). Segments can be
increased or decreased using the "Increment points btw cur" or "Decrement Points
btw cur" system commands (19).
The "Interpolation Effects" setpoint (20) determines what portion of the graph will
be effected by interpolation. The settings are displayed using Display Processor
module displayable messages (refer to Appendix E):
0:
1:
2:

on the entire graph (default)


between the cursors
in the active region

The type of interpolation used is defined by the "Rgn X interpolation mode" system
command for each region of the graph (21). These settings are also displayed
using Display Processor module displayable messages (refer to Appendix E):
None
Same as One
Flat
Linear
Parabolic 0
Parabolic 1
Parabolic 2
Refer to the figures as a guideline of how a graph might interpolate. Because of the
complexity of the math involved, it is difficult to predict exactly how a given profile
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 140 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


will be interpolated. Interpolation occurs either when the "Interpolate" system
command (22) is invoked or through "auto-interpolation which occurs when the
cursor is selected after a change has been made to the interpolation mode.
The "Profile new command" system command (23) can be used to clear the
display. If the profile has been previously "sent to parison," it still exists there.
The "Return profile to Module" system command (24) is used to save a profile to
the parison module. If a profile is part of a group, a command also exists to "Return
profile to Group." Profiles can also be saved to or loaded from cartridges - see the
Display Processor modfile.

Interpolation Modes

Interpolation = Flat

Interpolation = Parabolic 0
Zero slope in/out
(same as MACO 8000)

1640-IN-006-0-02

Interpolation = Linear

Interpolation = Parabolic 1
Zero slope out

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Interpolation = Parabolic 2
Zero slope in

Page 141 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Toolbox

Line
graph
Image:
Screen
Bar graphTest 1
SPC graph
Profile

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
SoftKey page: 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key
Profile Configuration

Profile Number:

Profile

Group ID:
Descriptor:

Profile Orientation:

Controller number:

Origin Location:

Card number:
Integer digits:
Fractional digits:

Accept

Cancel

Edit cfg

High limit:
Low limit:
Power-up:
Security level:
Recipe dependent:
Machine dependent:
Done

nEw

cleAr

preV

Next

deLete

(or Alt D) (or Alt E) (or Alt A)


(or Alt V) (or Alt N) (or Alt L)

4.3.4.1 Parison Profile Configuration Editor


With the "Profile" window displayed, either type "Alt E" or position the pointer over
the button labeled "Edit cfg" and click mouse. A second window titled "Profile
Configuration" will overlay the first window. The entries made in this window are
used to define the 48 possible parison profiles. The window contains thirteen entry
items. Use the Up and Down arrow keys or the mouse to position the white
underline cursor in the chosen entry item. Once located, either press return or
double click the mouse so that the green underline cursor appears.
Profile Number
Identifies which of the forty-eight possible profiles is being defined. Use "Prev,"
"Next" or "nEw" to increment or decrement the number.
Group ID
Determines the group (0-12) to which this profile belongs. A profile that is modified
on the display and then "returned to group" (returned from the display processor
to the parison module) will be returned to ALL profiles which have the same group
ID number. Zero (0) is the default setting. If the group ID is zero, that profile will NOT
be grouped.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 142 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Descriptor
Determines the profile (of this particular parison card) to which this profile number
will be assigned. What appears in the selection window is actually the descriptor
of the first setpoint (of one-hundred different setpoints) in each of the four possible
profiles, Profile A, Profile B, Profile C or Profile D.
Controller Number
Identifies which controller (of ALL attached to a single operator station) this profile
resides in.
Card Number
Identifies which card of a particular module type (within a particular controller) this
profile resides in (e.g., the first or second parison board).
Integer Digits
Determines the number of whole number (to the left of the decimal point) digits to
be displayed (for the setpoints in this profile). This entry can be from a minimum
of one (1) to a maximum of five (5). The total number of digits (integer plus
fractional) cannot exceed five (5).
Fractional Digits
Determines the number of fractional number (to the right of the decimal point) digits
to be displayed (for the setpoints in this profile). This entry can be from a minimum
of zero (0) to a maximum of four (4). The total number of digits (integer plus
fractional) cannot exceed five (5). Note that the number of fractional digits may
have been fixed in the modfile (see modfile printout).
High Limit
Determines the highest possible setting for the setpoints in this profile. The limit for
this entry is fixed in the modfile, but may be further constrained here. The highest
possible limit for a unipolar setpoint is 65535. The highest possible limit for a bipolar
setpoint is 32767 (see modfile printout).
Low Limit
Determines the lowest possible setting for the setpoints in this profile. The limit for
this entry is fixed in the modfile, but may be further constrained here. The lowest
possible limit for a unipolar setpoint is 0. The lowest possible limit for a bipolar
setpoint is -32768 (see modfile printout).
Power-up
Determines the power-up setting of the setpoints in this profile. Note that the ability
to make or change an entry here is determined in the modfile (see modfile printout).
Security Level
Determines the minimum security necessary in order to change this profile. Total
range is 1 - 4, but minimum is determined in modfile (see modfile printout).
Recipe Dependent

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 143 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Determines whether this profile will be recipe dependent or not. A "Y" entry means
that when a "Copy Recipe" is performed, this profile's settings will be copied. Note
that this entry may have been fixed by the modfile. Note also that a profile may be
either recipe dependent, or machine dependent, or both, or neither.
Machine Dependent
Determines whether this profile will be machine dependent or not. A "Y" entry
means that when a "Copy Insta-Set" is performed, this profile's settings will be
copied. Note that this entry may have been fixed by the modfile. Note also that a
profile may be either recipe dependent, or machine dependent, or both, or neither.
The Buttons
Clicking on "Next" or typing "Alt N" will cause "Number" to increment.
Clicking on "preV" or typing "Alt V" will cause "Number" to decrement.
Clicking on "nEw" or typing "Alt E" will cause "Number" to increment and a blank
configuration to be placed at that position. Note that if "nEw" is performed at the
end of the file, it will add an element to the end of the file. If "nEw" is performed in
the middle of the file, all of the following elements will be pushed out one position.
Clicking on "Clear" or typing "Alt C" will cause the entries for the profile number
presently in the window to be cleared.
Clicking on "deLete" or typing "Alt L" will cause the present profile number to be
deleted and all following profiles to be moved up one position.
Clicking on "Done" or typing "Alt D" will close the profile configuration editor.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 144 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Page
1 None
Image: Edit.
Mode:
..
Screen
Page
2
SoftKey
page: 1
Display.
Test 1 . .
Page
No. 3of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

Note that this menu does NOT appear until an


application and a screen have been selected.

4.4 Softkey (n/a for Sprites)


Select the softkey menu by typing "S" (the highlighted letter) or positioning the
pointer over the top of the word "Softkey" and pressing (and holding) the left mouse
button. The word "Softkey" will highlight and a menu containing two choices will
extend downward:
Edit
Display
To make a selection from within the menu, either type the highlighted letter within
the menu item or position the pointer (now a small hand) over the item (and release
the mouse button) or use the Up and Down arrow keys to highlight an item (and
press return).
4.4.1 Edit
Either type an "E" or position the pointer over the word "Edit" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Edit" and press return. A menu
will appear displaying three choices:
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Note that "Page 3" does NOT appear unless the screen editor is being operated
at the "System" level.
If the top line of the menu reads "... System Editor", the program is being operated
at the System level and Page 3 softkeys will appear as a menu item. If the top line
of the menu reads "... User Editor", the program is being operated at the User level
and Page 3 softkeys will not appear as a menu item. System or User level is
determined under the Application Menu "Editor Type." The only difference
between operating at the user level or the system level is the availability of Page
3 softkeys and the files created during the "Linking" process.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 145 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Page
1 None
Image: Edit.
Mode:
..
Screen
Page
2
SoftKey
page: 1
Display.
Test 1 . .
Page
No. 3of ctl. funcs: 0

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled
Page 1 Soft Key

abc Key

Number:
Function:

Note that Page 3


Softkeys are Unique!

Module Type:
Descriptor:
Controller number:
Card number:

preV

Read before making


changes to Page 3
Next

Clear

Done

(or Alt V) (or Alt N) (or Alt C) (or Alt D)

Note that any character set or size can


be used to describe Special Function Keys.
BEFORE entering Edit Softkey, choose a
character set and size from toolbox.

4.4.1.1 Page 1
Either type a "1" or position the pointer over the words "Page 1" and click the mouse
or use the arrow keys to highlight "Page 1" and press return. A window titled "Page
1 Softkey" will overlay the screen. The entries made in this window are used to
explicitly define the softkey being placed. As it first appears, the window will show
only two items (as well as the four buttons).
Number
Identifies which of the six softkey positions is being defined. This item cannot be
directly changed. Use "Prev" or "Next" to increment or decrement the number.
Function
Determines whether this softkey is a defined as a "Path" or a "Special Function."
Path

Note that a "Path" can be assigned to a screen (without a "Softkey").


See "Control Functions."
If "Path" is chosen, the screen file window will appear on the screen. Use the mouse
(click once) to highlight a choice or use the scroll bar to scroll the window. Clicking
on either of the arrows will move the highlighted area one position in the direction
of the arrow. Dragging the button (between the arrows) will scroll the window
proportionally to the movement of the button (move the button half-way and the
middle of the list will show in the window). Or use the keypad to move through the
list. Page Down moves the display down one page; Page Up moves the display up
one page; End moves the display to the end of the list; Home moves the display
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 146 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


to the beginning of the list; the arrow keys move the highlighted area one position
in the direction of the arrow. Once a screen is highlighted, either press return or
double click on the screen name. The screen file window will then disappear.
Special Function
If "Special Function" is chosen, several more entry items appear on the window.
Module Type
This is the broadest entry for the definition of a special function and determines
which list of descriptors will be displayed. Note that a "Special Function" softkey
is actually a system command programmed to a softkey.
Descriptor
Determines a particular system command within a particular module type. Once
an entry is made for module type and descriptor, a rectangular window will appear
in the lower right portion of the window. Type in a shortened version of the
descriptor and press return (twice, if necessary). For ASCII character descriptions,
simply type in the character from the keyboard. For non-keyboard ASCII characters, hold down the "Alt" key and type in the decimal equivalent of the ASCII code
USING THE KEYPAD (see character set Tab for the code). For Japanese, Korean
or Special character names, hold down the "Alt" key and type in the case sensitive
Font ID using the keyboard and top row number keys (NOT the keypad). Note that
the Cap Lock key may not work on all computers. If so, use the Shift key.
When editing previously defined special function keys, if the character set and size
of the key being edited does not match the the current character set and size, the
question "Use global character settings?" will appear on the screen immediately
after a descriptor is chosen. Typing "Y" or clicking on "Yes" will cause the character
set and size currently named in the upper left corner of the editor to be used for
renaming. Typing "N" or clicking on "No" causes the character set and size of the
present name to also be used for the replacement name.
Controller Number

IMPORTANT: Do NOT select Controller Number "0." Even though zero appears
as a choice, it is NOT a valid choice (choosing controller number "0" for the special
function of "Inc/Dec Character" causes the program to only display only a portion
of the character set).
Identifies which controller (of ALL attached to a single operator station) this system
command resides in.
Card Number
Identifies which card of a particular module type (within a particular controller) this
system command resides in (e.g., the first or second temperature board).
The Buttons
Clicking on Next or typing "Alt N" will cause the softkey to appear at the bottom
of the screen and will cause "Number" to increment.
Clicking on Prev or typing "Alt V" will cause the softkey to appear at the bottom of
the screen, but "Number" will decrement.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 147 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Clicking on Clear or typing "Alt C" will cause "Function" (and everything following)
to be cleared.
Clicking on Done or typing "Alt D" will also cause the softkey to appear at the bottom
of the screen. The window will disappear.
4.4.1.2 Page 2
Either type a "2" or position the pointer over the words "Page 2" and click the mouse
or use the arrow keys to highlight "Page 2" and press return. A window titled "Page
2 Softkey" will overlay the screen. The entries made in this window are used to
explicitly define the softkey being placed. Making an entry to Page 2 is identical to
the process of making an entry to Page 1.
4.4.1.3 Page 3
Note that Page 3 Softkeys can only be edited from the System Editor
Either type a "3" or position the pointer over the words "Page 3" and click the mouse
or use the arrow keys to highlight "Page 3" and press return. A window titled "Page
3 Softkey" will overlay the screen. The entries made in this window are used to
explicitly define the softkey being placed.
Note that Page 3 Softkeys will NOT be available for Editing or Displaying unless
the screen editor is being operated from the "System" level. System or User level
is determined under the Application Menu "Editor Type."

Page 3 Softkeys are different than other Softkeys!


There will be just ONE set of Page 3 Softkeys downloaded to the controller (no
matter how many Page 3's have been defined in the screen set).
The particular Page 3 the software will recognize will be the LAST set of Page 3
Softkeys defined (don't mess with them - leave as is).

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 148 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

SETPOINT
LO = 0.00

Sequence

Graph

Softkey

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Image: Edit.
Mode: None
..
Screen
SoftKey
page: 1
1
Display.
Test 1 . . Page
No.
of
ctl.
funcs: 0
Page 2
Element info
Page
3
abc Key

2.5 TIMER SETPOINT 11

HI = 65.53

PU = 1.00

SPAN = 65.53

SECURITY = 2
Recipe = Y

C = 1

R = 1

Machine = N

4.4.2 Display
Either type a "D" or position the pointer over the word "Display" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Display" and press return. A menu
will appear displaying three choices:
Page 1
Page 2
Element info
Page 3
Note that "Page 3" does NOT appear unless the screen editor is being operated
at the "System" level.
4.4.2.1 Page 1, 2, 3
Type the page number or position the pointer over the words "Page..." and click
the mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Page..." and press return.
The Softkeys for the chosen page (if any have been defined) will appear across the
bottom of the screen.
4.4.2.2 Element Information
This feature provides a means of quickly viewing the contents of control elements
on a screen. Information about a selected element is displayed in the softkey area.
The figure above shows Sequence (V2.5) setpoint, "Timer Setpoint 11" with a low
limit of 0.00, a high limit of 65.53, a power-up setting of 1.00, a span of 65.53, a
security level of 2, from card 1, rack (controller) 1, recipe dependent, not machine
dependent.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 149 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 150 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
Redraw
SoftKey set
page:
Character
... 1
No.
of
ctl.
funcs:
cLear screen . . . 0
sOund. . .
Delete
element
abc Key
Move element
modify Element
Snap. . .

4.5 Toolbox (expanded)


Note that this is the expanded toolbox that appears only when the screen editor
or sprite editor has been selected!
Select the toolbox menu by typing "T" (the highlighted letter) or positioning the
pointer over the top of the word "Toolbox" and pressing (and holding) the left
mouse button. The word "Toolbox" will highlight and the menu will extend
downward. A menu will appear containing eight items:
Redraw
Character set...
cLear screen...
sOund...
Delete element
Move element
modify Element
Snap...
To make a selection from within the menu, either type the highlighted letter within
the menu item or position the pointer (now a small hand) over the item (and release
the mouse button) or use the Up and Down arrow keys to highlight an item (and
press return).
4.5.1 Redraw
Either type an "R" or position the pointer over the word "Redraw" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Redraw" and press return.
Immediately after one or more of a group of overlapping items is added to or
deleted from a screen, chances are the screen will not appear as it actually should.
"Redraw" updates the entire screen and causes it to appear as an accurate
rendition of the actual screen that will appear on the controller.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 151 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor

Application

Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Image: Screen
Test 1

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
Redraw
SoftKey set
page:
Character
. . . 1 Ascii. . .
No. of
ctl. funcs:
0
..
cLear
screen
. . . Japanese.
Korean. . .
sOund. . .
Special. . .
Delete
element
abc Key
Move element
modify Element
Snap. . .

EL Display
Ascii. . .

8x16
16x32

Japanese. . . 16x16
32x32

Korean. . .

16x16
32x32

Special. . .

16x16
32x32

Japanese. . . 16x16

Korean. . .

16x16

Special. . .

16x16

LCD Display
Ascii. . .

8x8

4.5.2 Character Set


Character set is used to select which of the four available sets will be used by the
editor. Either type a "C" or position the pointer over the words "Character set" and
release the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Character set" and
press return. Four different choices will appear:
Ascii
Japanese
Korean
Special
Depending on the editor, each of the four character sets may have a small and
large version available.
4.5.2.1 ASCII
The electroluminescent (EL) display can use the entire ASCII character set (with
3 exceptions). The liquid crystal displays (LCDs) have a restricted character set
(see Characters Tab). Characters which appear on the keyboard can be typed in.
For non-keyboard characters, refer to the list of ASCII characters in the character
sets Tab. The list shows all available characters as well as their decimal equivalent.
To use those characters that do not appear on the keyboard, hold down the "Alt"
key and type in the decimal equivalent of the character on the numeric keypad
(Num Lock must be ON). Once the code is typed, releasing the "Alt" key will cause
the character to appear.
The ASCII character set can be used for any text element (and MUST be used for
setpoints and values).
The 8x16 pixel version of ASCII divides the EL screen into 21 lines of 80 characters.
The 16x32 pixel version of ASCII divides the EL screen into 10 lines of 40
characters each.
The 8x8 pixel version of ASCII divides the LCD screen into 21 lines of 40
characters.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 152 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


4.5.2.2 Japanese
The "Japanese" character set is a set consisting of approximately 1000 of the most
commonly used Japanese technical characters. Refer to the list of those characters in the character set Tab. The list shows the character as well as the JIS Code
for each character. To use a character, hold down the "Alt" key and type in the JIS
Code for that character (Do Not use the numeric keypad and Do note that the code
is case sensitive - use upper case letters - the Cap Lock key may not work on all
computers. If so, use the Shift key). Once the code is typed, release the "Alt" key
and the character appears.
The Japanese character set can be used for any text elements EXCEPT for
setpoints, values, module ASCII strings and a security setpoint).
The 16x16 pixel version of "Japanese" divides the EL screen into 21 lines of 40
characters each.
The 32x32 pixel version of "Japanese" divides the EL screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
The 16x16 pixel version of "Japanese" divides the LCD screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
4.5.2.3 Korean
The "Korean" character set is a set consisting of approximately 1000 of the most
commonly used Korean technical characters. Refer to the list of those characters
in the character set Tab. The list shows the character as well as an alpha-numeric
code for each character. To use a character, hold down the "Alt" key and type in
the code for that character (Do Not use the numeric keypad and Do note that the
code is case sensitive - use lower case letters). Once the code is typed, release
the "Alt" key and the character appears.
The Korean character set can be used for any text elements EXCEPT for setpoints,
values, module ASCII strings and a security setpoint).
The 16x16 pixel version of "Korean" divides the EL screen into 21 lines of 40
characters each.
The 32x32 pixel version of "Korean" divides the EL screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
The 16x16 pixel version of "Korean" divides the LCD screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
4.5.2.4 Special
The "Special" character set initially contains only two "sample" characters. It is
provided in order to allow for a customized character set to be "built" using the
Barber-Colman Font Editor. This "special" character set can be made up of any
16x16 character (international symbols or icons?). Note that even though "Special" must be created as a16x16 pixel font, it can be assigned to EL screens as a
32x32 pixel font.
Refer to the MACO Font Editor Program for complete details about creating a
character set.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 153 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Make certain to create the file as a 16x16 pixel font.
Make certain to name the Font file "Special."
Print a copy of the file once it is complete.
Creating and saving the Font file causes the Font Editor program to create two files:
SPECIAL.BMP
SPECIAL.TBL
Both of these files must be copied into the directory containing the screen editor
(OPTIGRAF.EXE).
Once "Special.BMP" and Special.TBL" have been copied into the program, the
"Special" character set is used identically to the others. To use a character, hold
down the "Alt" key and type in the code for that character (Do Not use the numeric
keypad and Do note that the code is case sensitive - the Cap Lock key may not work
on all computers. If so, use the Shift key). Once the code is typed, release the "Alt"
key and the character appears.
The Special character set can be used for any text elements EXCEPT for setpoints,
values, module ASCII strings and a security setpoint).
The 16x16 pixel version of "Special" divides the EL screen into 21 lines of 40
characters each.
The 32x32 pixel version of "Special" divides the EL screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
The 16x16 pixel version of "Special" divides the LCD screen into 10 lines of 20
characters each.
4.5.3 Clear Screen
Either type an "L" or position the pointer over the words "Clear Screen" and release
the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "Clear Screen" and press
return. Six different choices will appear:
Clear All
Dynamics Only
Statics Only
Graphic Text Only
Screen Area Only
Softkey Area Only
To make a selection from within the menu, either tpye the highlighted letter within
the menu item, or position the pointer over the item and click the mouse.
A small window with the question about really deleting will overlay the screen.
Clicking on "No" or typing "N" will return the program to the menu. Clicking on "Yes"
or typing "Y" will cause the selected items to be erased! Note that the only means
of recovering after performing a "Clear" of any type is to "Quit without Saving."

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 154 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

Toolbox

HH:MM:SS
Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
Redraw
SoftKey set
page:
Character
... 1
No.
of
ctl.
funcs:
cLear screen . . . 0
sOund. . .
Delete
element
abc Key
Move element
modify Element
Snap. . .

4.5.4 Sound
This menu item is used to select whether the computer's beeper is enabled or
disabled. Either type an "O" or position the pointer over the word "Sound" and click
the mouse or use the arrow keys to highlight "Sound" and press return. With sound
enabled, the beeper beeps when a valid graphic text keystroke is made. The only
use is to have it enabled while assigning Japanese, Korean or Special characters
to a screen (as the "Alt" key is released a beep occurs for valid characters).
To enable sound when it is disabled, either type an "E" or position the pointer over
the word "Enable" and click the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight
enable and press return.
To disable sound when it is enabled, either type a "D" or position the pointer over
the word "Disable" and click the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight
"Disable" and press return.
4.5.5 Delete, Move, or Modify an Element
Before an element can be deleted, moved or modified, it must first be "selected."
Click on the "select arrow" or press F3. Place the crosshair over the element and
either click the LEFT mouse button or press return. A small "box" at each corner
of the element indicates the element is selected. Once the element is selected, go
to the "Toolbox" and select "Delete," "Move," or "Modify" and release the mouse
button or use the arrow keys to highlight a choice and press return.
The FAST way to delete:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Press F3
Select the item (left mouse button)
Type "T"
Type "D"
Press return
Type "T"
Type "R"
(to redraw)
Press return

When "Moving," the selected element will immediately attach itself to the cursor.
Reposition the element and click the RIGHT mouse button or press return.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 155 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


The FAST way to move an element:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Press F3
Select the item (left mouse button)
Double click the RIGHT mouse button
Reposition the element
Click the RIGHT mouse button
Type "T"
Type "R"
(to redraw)
Press return

When "Modifying," if a graphic element has been selected, a small window will
appear. Press "Ok" or type an "O" or press return. Press and hold the LEFT mouse
button to resize or alter the element (or press return a second time and the
crosshair will attach itself to the element). Once the element is resized, either
release the mouse button or press return once more.
If a dynamic element has been selected, its menu box will appear. Click in with the
mouse or use the arrow keys to select the specific parameter to be changed and
then double click or press return to bring up the window. Once all the changes are
made, Type "Alt A" or click on "Accept" (or "Cancel").
The FAST way to modify an element:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Press F3
Select the item (left mouse button)
Double click the LEFT mouse button
Make the change
Type "T"
Type "R"
(to redraw)
Press return

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 156 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Control funcs

Graph

Softkey

Image: Screen
Test 1

Toolbox

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
Redraw
SoftKey set
page:
Character
... 1
No.
of
ctl.
funcs:
cLear screen . . . 0
sOund. . .
Delete
element
abc Key
Move element
modify Element
Snap. . .

Clicking anywhere in here


causes the crosshair to go here
With "Snap" enabled, clicking anywhere
within the boundary of a character will cause
the crosshair to "snap" to the upper left
corner of the invisible box.

HH:MM:SS

The resulting character


will be placed here

4.5.6 Snap
Snap is used to select whether text elements placed on the screen will snap to the
invisible grid or whether they will remain exactly as placed by the user. Either type
an "S" or position the pointer over the word "Snap" and release the mouse button
or use the arrow keys to highlight "Snap" and press return.
To enable snap when it is disabled, either type an "E" or position the pointer over
the word "Enable" and click the mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight
"Enable" and press return. To disable snap when it is enabled, either type a "D" or
position the pointer over the word "Disable" and click the mouse button or use the
arrow keys to highlight "Disable" and press return. Elements affected by snap are:
Setpoints
Values
Control Relays (all types)
Module ASCII Strings
Messages (all types)
System Commands
Increment/Decrement Setpoint
Security Setpoint
Graphic Text
Graphs
Grid size will match the selected character size.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 157 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


Rel. X.X
Application

OptiGrafix EL 41AA User Editor


Editors

Control funcs

Appl.: Test Screen Set 1


Editor: Screen
Char set: Ascii
Char size: 8x16
Snap: Enabled
Sound: Disabled

Graph

Softkey

HH:MM:SS

Toolbox

Image: Screen
Test 1

Help

(XXX,YYY)

Mode: None
About. . .
SoftKey page:
Help 1
No. of ctl. funcs: 0
abc Key

C:\BCED\help\help1.txt
HELP-BASIC INFO
MAIN MENU

F1

Mouse & Keyboard Controls

F2

Forms

F3

List Boxes

F4

Information Boxes

Alt-F1

Menus/Icons

F5

Directory Box

Alt-F2

Forms

F6

Menus

Alt-F3

Buttons

F7

Icons

Alt-F4

List Boxes

F8

General Information

Alt-F5

Information Boxes

MOUSE & KEYBOARD CONTROLS

4.6 Help
This menu item is used for on-line help. Select the Help menu by typing "H" or
positioning the pointer over word "Help" and pressing (and holding) the left mouse
button. The word "Help" will highlight and the menu will extend downward.
4.6.1 About
This menu item shows the version and revision of the OptiGrafix screen editor.
Either type an "A" or position the pointer over the word "About" and release the
mouse button or use the arrow keys to highlight "About" and press return. A small
window will appear containing pertinent data about the editor package.
4.6.2 Help
This menu item is used to bring up the on-line help window. Either type an "H" or
position the pointer over the word "Help" and release the mouse button or use the
arrow keys to highlight "Help" and press return. A large window titled "Help-Basic
Info Main Menu" will appear.
The Help window can be extended downward by grabbing the lower perimeter (as
shown above) and dragging downward.
"Help" contains a brief explanation of the different elements within the editor and
how to move around within them. Notice the menu selections immediately
following the window title. Pressing the corresponding function key (or Alt-F key)
will move the window to that position in the help file. The window can also be
advanced using the scroll bar or the arrow keys.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 158 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


5. Character Sets
5.1 ASCII Character Set (for EL Display)
ASCII

n/a*

n/a*

!
n/a*
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
.
/

Dec.

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

ASCII

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_

Dec.

48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95

ASCII

`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~

Dec.

ASCII

Dec.

96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143

Pt

144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191

/2
/4

ASCII

Dec.

192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239

ASCII

n
2

Dec.

240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255

*n/a means this character not available

Note that if the computer supports the IBM character set, all but three characters can be used. If the
computer does NOT support the IBM character set, some additional characters may not be available.
1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 159 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual


5.2 Partial ASCII Character Set (for LCD Display)
ASCII

Dec.

ASCII

Dec.

!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[

64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95

]
^
_

ASCII

`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}

Dec.

96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127

Because of the limited character set available, some "compromises" must be made for certain characters.
If Up and Down arrows are desired, use the caret symbol (decimal number 94) for the Up arrow and the lower
case "v" (decimal number 118) for the Down arrow.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 160 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 161 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 162 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 163 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 164 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 165 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 166 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 167 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 168 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 169 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 170 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 171 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 172 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 173 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 174 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 175 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 176 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 177 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 178 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 179 of 256

OptiGrafix Screen Editor Instruction Manual

Barber-Colman Company
Industrial Instruments Division

1354 Clifford Avenue


P.O. Box 2940
Loves Park, IL U.S.A. 61132-2940
Copyright 1996 Barber-Colman Company.

1640-IN-006-0-02

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Phone: 1-800-232-4343
FAX: (815) 637-5341
May 1996

Page 180 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendixes

A.

OptiGrafix Error Messages

B.

Linker Error Messages

C.

Machine Function Key Definitions

D.

Program Files / Directory Structure

E.

Module Displayable Messages (listed by modfile)

F.

Cable Assemblies & Pinouts (computer to controller)

G.

Print Function Samples

H.

OptiGrafix Quick Reference Guide

I.

Anomalies & Compatibility Issues

J.

Glossary

K.

Screen Grids

Appendix A
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 181 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix A
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 182 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
OptiGrafix Error Messages
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.

No errors
Error: not enough memory
Error: cannot find system cursor files!
Error: system data corrupted!
Error: character set .tbl file is corrupt!
Error: unable to read character set .bmp file!
Error: unable to read character set .tbl file!
Error: unable to open .txt file!
Error: deallocating expanded memory!
Error: system programmer caused this ERROR!
Error: read beyond end of file!
Error: operation failed!
Error: Expanded Memory System is corrupt!
Error: not enough memory!
Error: no Expanded Memory System detected!
Error: not enough Expanded Memory installed!
Error: mouse driver not installed!
Error: unable to open .txt file!
Error: unable to open security file!
Error: cannot go to application level!
Error: unable to close character set .tbl file!
Error: unable to close character set files!
Error: unable to close character set .bmp file!
Error: unable to read from or close character set files!
Error: unable to close cursor file!
Error: unable to open character set .tbl file!
Error: unable to open character set .bmp file!
Error: unable to open or close character set files!
Error: module file editor version conflict!
Error: unnable to read module file!
Error: unable to open module file!
Error: unable to close module file!
Error: security file read error!
Error: security file write error!
Error: unable to close security file!
Error: security file access error!
Error: module file is corrupt!
Error: no more module files found!
Error: module file path or file not found!
Error: key message file write error!
Error: unable to close key message file!
Error: key message file access error!
Error: txt message file write error!
Error: unable to close text message file!
Error: message text file access error!
Error: unable to read from config file!
Error: unable to open config file!
Error: unable to find module definition ID!
Error: syntax of module filename not valid!
Error: unable to find the specified control function!
Error: unable to find the specified module file type!
Error: unable to open mach. func. key file!
Error: unable to read from mach. func. key file!
Error: unable to write to mach. func. key file!
Appendix A

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 183 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
OptiGrafix Error Messages
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.

Error: unable to close mach. func. key file!


Error: unable to open mach. func. key file!
Error: image won't fit on screen!
Error: screen contains max number of dynamic elements!
Error: uable to write to config file!
Error: unable to close config file!
Error: unable to open file!
Error: unable to write to file!
Error: unable to read file!
Error: image file or path not found!
Error: corrupted image file!
Error: uanble to close version file!
Error: unable to close config file!
Error: unable to close image file!
Error: unable to establish default path!
Error: system path not found!
Error: sprite path or file not found!
Error: unable to read sprite file!
Error: unable to write sprite file!
Error: unable to open sprite file!
Error: unable to close sprite file!
Error: uanble to save sprite file!
Error: cannot close file!
Error: cannot open memtracking file!
Error: cannot close memtracking file!
Error: image is located off the screen!
Error: there are no specified files in the selected application!
Error: unable to create specified list file!
Error: print job aborted!
Error: image file not compatible with this version editor!
Error: element was not placed on screen!
Error: element overlaps another element!
Error: there are more than 25 errors!
Error: user canceled linker!
Error: maximum of 200 screen files has been reached!
Error: element not found in screen config file!
Error: cannot open application header file (*.HDR)!
Error: cannot open temporary editor file (*.TMP)!
Error: cannot open linker screen object file!
Error: cannot open linker screen version object file!
Error: cannot open image screen source file (*.SRC)!
Error: cannot open SPC config file (SPC.CFG)!
Error: cannot open linker screen SPC object file (SCRN_SPC.OBJ)!
Error: cannot open linker error file (LINKER.ERR)!
Error: cannot open message resource file (*.RSC)!
Error: improper use of KEYWORD syntax!
Error: cannot detect VGA graphics card!
Error: cannot find graphics driver file!
Error: invalid graphics driver!
Error: insufficient memory to load graphics driver!
Error: un-recognized error in graphics driver system!
Error: VGA adaptor does not support 640x480 mode!
Error: This bargraph is unmodifiable!
Error: Sprite not found!
Appendix A

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 184 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Linker Error Messages
35-Spec. Control func. Mult sw not found
36-Spec. Modfile type Mult sw not found
37-Spec. Control func. Ascii not found
38-Spec. Modfile type Ascii not found
39-Spec. Control func. Display not found
40-Spec. Modfile type Disp. not found
41-Spec. Control func. ON/OFF not found
42-Spec. Modfile type ON/OFF not found
43-Spec. Control func. CR not found
44-Spec. Control func. SysCmd not found
45-Spec. Modfile type SysCmd not found
46-Spec. Control func. BarVal not found
47-Spec. Modfile type BarVal not found
48-Spec. Control func. Bar SP not found
49-Spec. Modfile type Bar SP not found
50-Spec. Control func. I/D SP not found
51-Spec. Modfile type I/D SP not found
52-Modfile path/file for CR not found
53-Modfile path/file for SysCmd not found
54-Modfile path/file for SP not found
55-Modfile path/file Value not found
56-Modfile path/file Message not found
57-Modfile path/file Mult sw not found
58-Modfile path/file Ascii not found
59-Modfile path/file Disp. not found
60-Modfile path/file Bar/val not found
61-Modfile path/file Bar/SP not found
62-Modfile path/file I/D SP not found
63-WARNING: Setpoint format change
64-WARNING: Setpoint overlap
65-WARNING: Value format change
66-WARNING: Value overlap
67-WARNING: User cancelled linker
68-WARNING: Inactive Path

00 NO ERRORS
01-No Dynamic Elements in Config. File
02-No Operator CR ID in Modfile
03-No System Command ID in Modfile
04-No Setpoint in Config. File
05-No Setpoint ID in Modfile
06-No Value ID in Config. File
07-No Value ID in Modfile
08-No On/Off switch msg. ID in Modfile
09-No Multi-pos. sw. msg. ID in Modfile
10-No Module ASCII string ID in Modfile
11-No Module Displayable ID in Modfile
12-No Bargraph-Value in Config. File
13-No Bargraph-Setpoint in Config. File
14-No Bargraph-Value ID in Modfile
15-No Bargraph-Setpoint ID in Modfile
16-No Bargraph-Dev Value in Config. File
17-No Bargraph-Dev SP in Config. File
18-No Bargraph-Dev Value in Modfile
19-No Bargraph-Dev SP in Modfile
20-No IDSetpoint-SP ID in Config. File
21-No IDSetpoint-SP ID in Modfile
22-WARNING: TEXT.RSC file not found
23-WARNING: No Message Text
24-WARNING: KEYWORD.RSC file not found
25-WARNING: No Keyword Text found
26-WARNING: PANEL.SRC not found
27-WARNING: No Mach. Func. data found
28-WARNING: SECURITY.SRC not found
29-WARNING: No Security data found
30-Specific Control func. SP not found
31-Spec. Modfile type for SP not found
32-Spec. Control func. Value not found
33-Spec. Modfile type Value not found
34-Spec. Modfile type CR not found

Note that messages beginning with the word "WARNING" are non-fatal.
All other messages are fatal and MUST be corrected before
linking can be completed.

ID Number Definition
1 1
Controller No. (1 thru F)
Card No. (1 thru F)
Function (fn)
0 1 = Sequence
0 2 = Temperature
0 3 = Hydraulic
0 4 = Parison
2 0 = Display Handler
2 3 = SPI Handler
2 4 = MACO-Net/Aux. Int.
2 5 = Display
2 6 = Cartridge
3 0 = RS-232
3 8 = RS-485
4 0 = Data Handler

1640-IN-007-0-03

03 0 0 82
Corresponds to "ty"
in modfile .txt file
0082 = 130
16

10

For this example ID, view the


Hydraulics Modfile (03111110.TXT)
and locate Value number 130.
Note it is titled "Ram Pressure"

Request Type:
0 = Value
1 = Setpoint
2 = Control Relay
3 = Message Bank
4 = ASCII String
5 = Module Alterable Setpoint
6 = Cmd Type 1
7 = Cmd Type 2
8 = Reserved
9 = Setpoint Limits

Appendix B

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 185 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix B
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 186 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Machine Function Key Definitions
(Injection Standard Screen Set)
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Module
Type

Description

Controller
Number

Card
Number

Switch
Action

Security
Level

Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler

Momentary CR 1779
Momentary CR 1773
Momentary CR 1766
Momentary CR 1776

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

momentary
momentary
momentary
momentary

1
1
1
1

Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler

Momentary CR 1778
Momentary CR 1764
Momentary CR 1771
Momentary CR 1775
Operator CR 1702
Momentary CR 1768

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

momentary
momentary
momentary
momentary
on
momentary

1
1
1
1
1
1

Data Handler

Momentary CR 1777

momentary

Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler

Momentary CR 1767
Momentary CR 1770
Momentary CR 1774
Momentary CR 1784

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

momentary
momentary
momentary
momentary

1
1
1
1

Barber-Colman
17

18 10

19 11

20 12

21 13

22 14

23 15

24 16

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Appendix C
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 187 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Machine Function Key Definitions
(Extrusion Standard Screen Set)
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Description

Controller
Number

Card
Number

Switch
Action

Security
Level

Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler

Momentary CR 1779
Momentary CR 1773
Momentary CR 1766
Momentary CR 1776

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

momentary
momentary
momentary
momentary

1
1
1
1

Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler

Momentary CR 1778
Momentary CR 1764
Momentary CR 1771
Momentary CR 1775
Operator CR 1702
Momentary CR 1768

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

momentary
momentary
momentary
momentary
toggle
momentary

1
1
1
1
1
1

Data Handler

Momentary CR 1777

momentary

Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler

Operator CR 1659
Operator CR 1658
Momentary CR 1767
Momentary CR 1770
Momentary CR 1774
Momentary CR 1784

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

toggle
toggle
momentary
momentary
momentary
momentary

1
1
1
1
1
1

Module
Type

Machine Function Key Definitions


(Blowmolding Standard Screen Set)
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Module
Type

Description

Controller
Number

Card
Number

Switch
Action

Security
Level

1
1
1
1

momentary
momentary
Selector Sw

1
1
1
1

Data Handler
Data Handler
Data Handler

Momentary CR 1753
Op Sw 4, Pos 1 CR 1894

1
1
1

Data Handler

Op Sw 1, Pos 2 CR 1882

Data Handler

Momentary CR 1754

Data Handler

Op Sw 4, Pos 1 CR 1893

Data Handler

Op Sw 1, Pos 2 CR 1881

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

Data Handler

Momentary CR 1761
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

Data Handler

Op Sw 4, Pos 1 CR 1893 (Off)

Data Handler

Op Sw 4, Pos 1 CR 1881 (Off)

Data Handler

Momentary CR 1762

Selector Sw

momentary
Selector Sw
Selector Sw

1
1
1
1
1
1

momentary
1
Selector Sw
Selector Sw

momentary

1
1
1
1
1
1
Appendix C

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 188 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Program Files
Module Files
01111110
02111210
03111110
25111110
30111310
40111110
01111110
02111210
03111110
25111110
30111310
40111110

MOD
MOD
MOD
MOD
MOD
MOD
TXT
TXT
TXT
TXT
TXT
TXT

Module Files History Disk


V010
V011
V022
V023

Module Files History - NR Disk


V022-NR
V023-NR

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

Earlier modfile versions


(if there are any)
will be in a directory named
for the version/revision
MOD is the actual modfile

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

If your Data Handler modfile is


Version 2.2 or 2.3, you may
require these modfiles also. The
need for these modfiles was
eliminated with Version 2.4
(NR = Non Recipe).

TXT is a reference file.


Print these files for
help in locating specific
setpoints, values, etc.

The filenames are coded as follows:


ttuvwxyz.MOD or

ttuvwxyz.TXT

where:
tt is the function type (in hex). Types are:

01
02
03
04
25
30
40

Sequence
Temperature
Hydraulic
Parison
Display Proc.
RS-232 Comm.
Data Handler

u is the minimum controller number (in hex)


v is the maximum controller number (in hex)
w is the minimum card number (in hex)
x is the maximum card number (in hex)
y is the modfile editor version (in hex)
z is the module combination flag (0 or 1)
0
1

indicates a single module file definition


indicates multiple module file definitions
Appendix D

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 189 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Screen Sets included with V3.3 OptiGrafix

INJMOD (Current Injection Modfiles)


BLWMOD (Current Blow molding Modfiles)
EXTMOD (Current Extrusion Modfiles)
MODFILES (Previous Versions of Modfiles)

(DOS filename)

(OptiGrafix name)

EL
INJUSR
ADB0000

M4000 STANDARD USER V3.1

ADB0000
ADB0001
ADB0002
ADB0003

MACO 12 SLOT SYSTEM V3.1


MACO 16 SLOT SYSTEM V3.2
MACO 2 CHASSIS SYSTEM V3.2
MACO 3 CHASSIS SYSTEM V3.3

ADB0000

MACO 5000 USER SCRN V03.01

ADB0000
ADB0001
ADB0002
ADB0003

MACO 12 SLOT SYSTEM V3.1


MACO 16 SLOT SYSTEM V3.2
MACO 2 CHASSIS SYSTEM V3.2
MACO 3 CHASSIS SYSTEM V3.3

ADB0000

MACO 6000 series V1.1

ADB0000
ADB0001
ADB0002
ADB0003
ADB0004

MACO 12 SLOT SYSTEM V3.1


MACO 16 SLOT SYSTEM V3.2
MACO 2 CHASSIS SYSTEM V3.2
MACO 3 CHASSIS SYSTEM V3.3
MACO 6500 System Screens

INJSYS

EXTUSR
EXTSYS

BLOWUSR
BLOWSYS

The Suggested Directory Structure


The suggested directory structure for OptiGrafix is that shown in Section 7 (the way the installation routine creates
the directories). If for any reason a different structure is called for, System and User screens should be maintained
in separate directories:
CUSTOMER
USER
USER SCREENS
SYSTEM
SYSTEM SCREENS

System and User screens can be stored in the same directory, but it is NOT recommended.

Appendix D
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 190 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Temperature Card Module Displayable Messages
Description

Calibration Message:
(Blank) (Assign Text Message Number 0)(63-74 may appear)
CALIBRATE?
TC SHORTED?
40 MV CONNECTED?
CAL SPOOL CONNECTED?
OK TO CONTINUE CAL?
CALIBRATED
NOT CALIBRATED
CALIBRATING
CAL NOT ENABLED
SAVE CALIBRATION?
WRITING TO EEPROM

Length
(Pixels)

160

Appendix E
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 191 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Hydraulic Card Module Displayable Messages
Description

Length
(Pixels)

Line Graph Channel Select 1, 2, 3 or 4


Disabled (Assign Text Message Number 603)(603-618 may appear)
Ram Vel SP
Ram PR SP
Ram PR
Clamp PR
Ram Vel
Ram Pos
Clamp Pos
Ejector Pos
Tach RPM
PID Output
Analog Out1
Analog Out2
Analog Out3
Analog Out4
Screw Out

88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88

Line Graph Channel Select 1, 2, 3 or 4


(Blank)(Assign Text Message Number 622)(622-637 may appear)
ips
psi
psi
psi
ips
in
in
in
rpm
%
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
%

24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24

Line Graph Mode (not used)


Transfer Mode (not used)
Factory Cal Mode (not used)

Appendix E
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 192 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Display Processor Module Displayable Messages
Description

Length
(Pixels)

Switch Bank 1 (reserved)(not used)


Switch Bank 2 (reserved)(not used)
Security Index (not used)
Dir File Type - Line 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
(Blank)(Assign Text Message Number 641)(641-666 may appear)
Printer
Reserved 2
System Modfile
RLD
System Screen
User Screen
User Config
Recipe
Reserved 9
SPC Label file
Timeslot data
User Modfile
Reserved 13
Reserved 14
System Config
Reserved 16
Reserved 17
Reserved 18
Reserved 19
Insta-set
Reserved 21
Reserved 22
Reserved 23
Reserved 24
Reserved 25
File
File
File
File

Xfer
Xfer
Xfer
Xfer

112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112

active (not used)


phase (not used)
source (not used)
destination (not used)

Keyword Setpoint (not used)


Interpolation Effects
On the entire profile (Assign Text Message Number 143)(143-145 may appear)
Between the Cursors
In the Active Region

168
168
168

Region 1-5 Interpolation Mode


Same as One (Assign Text Message 147)(147-153 may appear)
None
Flat
Linear
Parabolic 0
Parabolic 1
Parabolic 2

88
88
88
88
88
88
88

Active Group (not used)


Channel 2 Data Source (not used)
Cursor Movement Mode (not used)
Active Region (not used)
Interpolation for Active Region (not used)

Appendix E
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 193 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Data Handler Module Displayable Messages
Description

Length
(Pixels)

MTS Error Code


(Assign Text Message Number 256)(256-512 may appear)

208

STS Error Code


(Assign Text Message Number 256)(256-512 may appear)

208

STM Error Code


(Assign Text Message Number 256)(256-512 may appear)

208

STP Error Code


(Assign Text Message Number 256)(256-512 may appear)

208

PTS Error Code


(Assign Text Message Number 256)(256-512 may appear)

208

DHTS Error Code


(Assign Text Message Number 256)(256-512 may appear)

208

System Message #1 through #10


(Assign Text Message Number 0)(256-768 may appear)

208

Monitor Message #1 through #40


(Assign Text Message Number 0)(256-768 may appear)

208

Time of Day #1 through #10, day ent


(Assign Text Message Number 0)(576-585 may appear)

72

Time of Day #1 through #10, unit ent


(Assign Text Message Number 0)(598-601 may appear)

72

Module Type #1 through #18


(Assign Text Message Number 0)(256-768 may appear)

208

Set RTC Month


(Assign Text Message Number 585)(586-597 may appear)

72

Set RTC Weekday


(Assign Text Message Number 576)(577-585 may appear)

72

SPC Variable Selection (not used)


Line Graph Select Msg 1-4
(Assign Text Message Number 603)(603-618 may appear)

88

Line Graph Units Msg 1-4


(Assign Text Message Number 622)(622-637 may appear)

24

Math Trace Buffer Cmd 1-20


(Assign Text Message Number 0)(683-715 may appear)

96

Alarm Log Message 1-16


(Assign Text Message Number 174)(174-190 may appear)

208

Appendix E
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 194 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Communications Cable Pinouts
A - 1 3 7 0 9 - 0 0 0 - 0 - X X (XX = No. of Ft.)
Cable Assembly
Female DB9 to Unterminated

*A-13709-100-0-XX

(XX = No. of Ft.)


Cable Assembly
Female DB9 to Female DB9

DB9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Shield
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Shield
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI

Black
White
Red
Green
Brown
Blue
Orange
Yellow
Purple

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Shield
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI

Chassis
Black
Gnd DCD
White
TXD
Red
RXD
Green
DSR
Brown
SG
Blue
DTR
Orange CTS
Yellow
RTS
Purple
RI

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Shield
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI

DB9

DB9

PC to MACO
A - 1 3 7 0 9 - 2 0 0 - 0 - X X (XX = No. of Ft.)
Cable Assembly
Female DB9 to Female DB25

Solder Pad View

DCD
TXD
RXD
DSR
SG
DTR
CTS
RTS
RI

DB9

1
3
2
6
5
4
8
7
9
DB25

MACO to Printer
A - 1 3 7 0 9 - 3 0 0 - 0 - X X (XX = No. of Ft.)
Cable Assembly
Female DB9 to Male 6 Pin DIN
(Epson Printer)

Black
White
Red
Green
Brown
Blue
Orange
Yellow
Purple

1
8
2
3
6
7
20
5
4
22

DB9

6 Pin DIN

Chassis Gnd 6
Black
White

TXD
RXD

1
3

Red
Green

Signal Gnd
DTR
Not Used

5
2
4

Stub these
Wires:
Brown
Blue
Orange
Yellow
Purple

MACO to Epson Printer


A - 1 3 7 0 9 - 4 0 0 - 0 - X X (XX = No. of Ft.)
Cable Assembly
Female DB9 to Male DB25
(Serial to Parallel
Converter)

DB9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

DB25

Shield
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI

MACO to Parallel Converter


1640-IN-007-0-03

Chassis Gnd 1

Red

RXD 3

Black
Green

SG 7
DTR 20

Appendix F

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 195 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Communications Cable Part Numbers

DB9 Connector Kit, Female


9 Pin Female D Connector
Jack Screws (2)
9 Pin Connector Housing

71-761
19-16-352
50-1628
E24-1147

DB25 Connector Kit, Male


25 Pin Male D Connector
Jack Screws (2)
25 Pin Connector Housing

71-776
E24-22
50-1628
E24-1148

DB25 Connector Kit, Female


25 Pin Female D Connector
Jack Screws (2)
25 Pin Connector Housing

71-762
E24-175
50-1628
E24-1148

Cables:
RS232 Communications
RS232 to Black Box Serial to Parallel Converter
RS485 Communications
Flatpanel to Data Handler
Flatpanel to Power Supply

9 Conductor RS232 Cable


(Belden Type 9539)
4 Conductor RS232 Cable
(Belden Type 9534)
3 Conductor RS485 Cable
(Belden Type 8772)
3 Conductor Cable
(Alpha Type 1737)
2 Conductor, 18 AWG
(Belden Type 8760)

E26-210
E26-106
E26-211
46-24
16-51-11

Appendix F

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 196 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

The Following Print Function Samples


are provided only to show
the format of the printouts.
Do NOT assume that the screens
provided with your system
match these printouts.
Print the screens and messages
accompanying this kit
before performing any
screen programming.

Appendix G

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 197 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 198 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 199 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 200 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 201 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 202 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 203 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 204 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 205 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 206 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 207 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 208 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 209 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 210 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 211 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 212 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 213 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 214 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 215 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 216 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 217 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 218 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 219 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 220 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 221 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 222 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 223 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 224 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 225 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 226 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 227 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 228 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 229 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 230 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 231 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 232 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 233 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 234 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 235 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 236 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 237 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 238 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 239 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 240 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 241 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 242 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 243 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix G
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 244 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
OptiGrafix Quick Reference Guide

User or System Level:

Read and FOLLOW the installation procedure.


If something goes wrong (anytime):
READ the manual

Application; Editor Type


Selecting an Application or changing a Modfile Path:
For Applications:
Application; Select; Existing

For Changing Modfile Paths:


Application; Utilities; change Modfile path

Highlight Directories & Drives window (Tab key or click on title)


Highlight double period and <return> to back up one directory (or double click left mouse on highlighted area)
Highlight the dir./drive (Up/Down arrow keys) and <return> (or double click left mouse on highlighted area)
With desired application appearing in Application File Name window:
Highlight Applications File Name window (Tab key or click on title)
Highlight the application (Up/Down arrow keys) and <return> (or double click left mouse on highlighted area)
or

Highlight the application and click mouse on "Accept" (or type Alt A)
Click on "Yes" (or type Y)

With desired module files appearing in the Module Filenames window:


Highlight Module Filename window (Tab key or click on title)
Click mouse on "Accept" (or type Alt A) or <return>
or

Highlight a module filename and double click left mouse on it.

Printing:

Accessing DOS from within the program:

Application; Report generator

Application; Utilities; dos Shell

Select an application; Select a printer; "X" selections

Type "exit" to return to OptiGrafix

Click on "Accept" (or type Alt A)


Moving Around:

CTRL C aborts printing

Mouse it!

For menu items:


Selecting a Screen or Sprite:
Use "hot keys" (capped menu letters)
Editors; Screen; Select; Existing
or
or

Editors; Messages; Sprite; Select; Existing


Highlight desired screen/sprite (Up/Down arrows;
Page Up/Page Down; End/Home) and <return>
(or double click left mouse on highlighted area)

Left/Right arrow keys and <return>; once menu


is extended, Up/Down arrow keys and <return>

For screen area:


Tab from menu to editing area to softkeys, etc.

Click on "Accept" (or type Alt A)


or

When placing elements:


Enable "Snap" to fit on a predefined grid pattern

Arrow keys from anywhere in editing area

Do not edit Page 3 Softkeys


without reading the manual!
Appendix H

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 245 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
OptiGrafix Quick Reference Guide
ASCII Characters:
abc

F1

Graphic Text

or

Japanese and Korean Characters:

Click in on screen

Click in on screen

Type from keyboard

Hold down SHIFT ALT keys and type


in case sensitive code (do NOT
use Numeric keypad)
(see Tab labeled Character Sets)

Hold down ALT key and type in


decimal form of ASCII character
code on Numeric keypad
(Num Lock ON)
(see Tab labeled Character Sets)

Press the desired F key


F4Draw Pixel
F5Draw Rectangle

Press (and hold) the left mouse button (or press <return>)
to establish first point

F6Draw Circle

Use the mouse or arrow keys to move the cursor


(press and hold CTRL key to make rectangle a square)

F7Draw Polyline

Release the mouse button (or press <return> a second time) to


establish next point

F3Select Arrow

To Select any element:


Press F3 (or click on select arrow)
Place crosshair over element

Deleting FAST:
Press F3
Select the item (left mouse button)
Type "T"
Type "D"
Press <return>
Type "T"
Type "R"(to redraw)
Press <return>

Click left mouse (or press <return>)


(a small box will appear at each corner)

Modifying FAST:

Moving FAST:

Press F3
Select the item (left mouse button)
Double click LEFT mouse button
Make the change
Type "T"
Type "R"(to redraw)
Press <return>

Press F3
Select the item (left mouse button)
Double click RIGHT mouse button
Reposition the element
Click the RIGHT mouse button
Type "T"
Type "R"(to redraw)
Press <return>

F8Paint

See Appendixes for:

Press F3
Select the item (left mouse button)
Press F8
Type "T"
Type "R"(to redraw)
Press <return>
(Repeat to undo)

Error Messages; Program Files; Machine Function


Key Definitions; Module Displayable Messages;
Cable Assembly & Pinout (computer to controller)
Printer Function Samples; Anomalies & Compatibility
Issues; Glossary; and Screen Grids.

Appendix H
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 246 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
OptiGrafix Anomalies & Compatibility Issues

Display Processor Software Version 2.0 and earlier


Version 2.0 and earlier of the display processor software will not tolerate 2 carriage
returns in a row (when placing graphic text). A musical note may appear in a
location that should contain graphic text. To rectify, either put a space between the
carriage returns or place each line of graphic text as a separate element (and avoid
carriage returns).
Display Processor Software Version 3.0
Version 3.0 of the display processor software reads security codes from the User
screen set only. Do NOT create or edit security codes from the System screen set.
If for some reason, the User screen set does not load correctly, the operator station
will be at Level 5 security, which allows for file transfer to occur.
Display Processor Software (ALL)
Messages that are to appear on User screens should be edited from the User type
editor. Messages that are to appear on System screens should be edited from the
System type editor. Note that the "system messages" which appear in the lower
left corner of the display are taken from the system message file. Generally, it is
not advisable (for an end user) to edit system screens or message files.
Report Generator (OptiGrafix V3.x)
The error message "Can't Find/Read File" may be displayed when attempting to
print text messages, keywords, security, machine function keys, etc. This error can
be corrected by opening the respective editor and "saving."
The data column of LCD screen printouts incorrectly reference the X-Y coordinates of an EL screen application. Dividing the number shown by "2" gives you
the correct number (the EL is 640 x 400 pixels; the LCD is 320 x 200 pixels).
A general protection error (GPF) may occur if an ASCII text printout is requested
and the printer is still "off line." Make certain the printer is turned on, on-line and
selected in the program.
Copying Sprites (OptiGrafix V3.x)
Using the OptiGrafix "copy Sprite" function can cause sprite index problems. The
problem becomes apparent when selecting a sprite to be placed on a screen and
one other than that selected appears on the screen. To avoid the situation, use a
DOS-copy (or copy from Windows) to copy sprites.
Do this: Using OptiGrafix, select the source application and invoke the sprite editor
in order to determine the number of the sprite (xxxx of xxxx) file to be copied. The
number corresponds to the actual sprite file number (SPRTxxxx.RSC) in the
source directory. Copy the sprite to an ISOLATED directory for renaming later.
Using OptiGrafix, select the target application and invoke the sprite editor in order
to determine the HIGHEST numbered sprite in the application.
Appendix I
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 247 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
OptiGrafix Anomalies & Compatibility Issues
Rename the previously copied sprite with the next highest number (for example,
if the highest numbered sprite in the target application was "SPRT0015.RSC," then
rename the copied sprite as "SPRT0016.RSC" and copy it into the target directory.
Purging an Application containing Math Functions (V3.x OptiGrafix)
The standard EL blow molding user screen set contains a "drive ratio" math
function. If the "purge application" feature is invoked, the message "Elements Not
Found in Config being Set to Defaults" will appear when the math editor is later
opened. Click on "OK" and the following elements will be displayed:
Setpoint ~ Spare Setpoint #7
Setpoint ~ Spare Setpoint #6
Setpoint ~ Spare Setpoint #5
The message can be ignored since these elements are NOT actuallly used in the
math function. Click the left mouse button somewhere off of the info box in order
to display the math program. Exit with saving to avoid repeating this procedure
(until the next "purge application" is performed).

Appendix I
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 248 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Glossary
Application

A screen set and its related files (text messages, sprites, keywords, etc.).

Bar Graph

A graph function which uses parallel bars of varying length to illustrate comparative
values.

Control Relay

An addressable location which serves as the equivalent of an electro-mechanical relay.

Distribution Curve

A specialized bar graph used to evaluate data gathered during statistical process control.

Electroluminescent

A luminescence (light) produced by the activation of a dielectric phospor by an alternating


current. Used in electronic displays because of its visibility and resolution.

INSTA-SET

The memory cartridge which inserts into the front of the operator station and is used for
storage. Also used to describe a "level" of saving. Performing an "insta-set" saves both
machine dependent and recipe dependent setpoints (as opposed to performing a "save
recipe" which saves only recipe dependent setpoints).

Keyword

A special version of a text message file (created using the Keyword Editor) which
contains a group words in several different languages. Changing a setpoint changes the
language in which the word is displayed.

Line Graph

A graphic function which allows the plotting of a specific group of setpoints and values
for visual comparison of results versus expectations.

Linker

A software routine used to combine various screen elements into a set of files which then
can be transferred to the controller. Whenever editing of any sort is performed, the
application must then be linked and then transferred.

Liquid Crystal

A type of electronic display which uses voltage to align liquid crystal molecules (which
inturn appear as a dark area on the display). LCD's are used on electronic displays
because of their low power consumption and relative low cost. They are generally slower
and less visible than other forms of display, but more economic.

Machine Function
Key

One of a group of keys optionally located on the operator station. These keys are
programmed (using the Machine Function Key Editor) to imitate some sort of switch
(toggle, momentary, or selector).

MACO Controller

Any one of three generations of a family of controllers manufactured by Barber-Colman


Company for the control of plastics molding processes.

Math Option

An option available on certain models of MACO controllers which allows screen


programmers to create custom algorithms for their specific needs.

Message

A group of files used by the controller to inform the operator of changing conditions within
the controller. There can be several message files within each application (but only one
of each type). The different types are: text messages, keywords and sprites. In addition
to these files, there are also "Module ASCII Strings" which are messages contained
entirely within the module software.

Modfile

A module file. This file contains all of the information about a particular controller function.
This information is used to create screens and write RLD.

Appendix J
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 249 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Glossary
Module ASCII String

A specialized function (from the modfile) used to display a message or group of


messages which are contained within the module's software (as opposed to the message
file). When programming a module ASCII string to a screen, all that is done is to program
an area for the message to appear.

Module Displayable
Message

A specialized function (from the modfile) which points to a position in one of the message
files (usually the text message file). A module displayable message can have as many
as sixteen different states. The number of states should NOT be changed. The
CONTEXT of each message should NOT be changed.

Momentary Switch
CR

A subset of the operator control relays (usually assigned to a machine function key)
which remain energized only as long as the key is depressed.

Operator CR

A subset of the System Control Relays set aside for operator use. They reside in the Data
Handler modfile and occupy system address 1657-1944).

Operator Selector
Switch CR

A subset of the operator CRs set aside for use as multi-position selector switches. These
CRs differ from Setup Operator Selector Switches in that they are not saved on Insta-Set.

Path

In DOS terminology, specifies the location of a file within a directory tree.

Power-up

Generally used when referring to the state a function assumes when power is applied to
the controller.

Profile Graph

A parison profile graph. Used in blowmolding applications in order to help define the
weight and thickness (and ultimately the final shape) of the plastic being molded.

R Chart

A chart of the ranges of a number of subgroups.

Recipe

A group of setpoints (defined at screen editing time) and control relays (Data Handler
modfile, System Address 1785-1824) used to define the operation of a particular mold.

SPC

Statistical Process Control. A means of mathematically analyzing and graphing a


process so as to make improvements.

Screen Path

A screen path is an interactive area programmed to an operator station screen (onscreen path) or softkey, which, when selected, causes the operator station to change to
the screen named.

Security Setpoint

A specialized setpoint which is used to enter the security code (chosen in the Security
Editor). When a code is entered as this setpoint, the operator station will switch to the
security level determined by that code.

Setpoint

A numerical setting used to determine a variety of controller settings.

Setup Operator CR

A subset of the operator CRs which is saved with recipes or Insta-Sets.

Setup Operator
Selector Switch CR

A subset of the operator CRs which is saved with recipes or Insta-Sets.

Soft Key

One of a group of keys directly below the operator station display. These keys can be
programmed (using the Softkey Edit function) to be a path key or a "special function" key.
A "special function" key is a softkey programmed to a system command.
Appendix J

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 250 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Glossary
Sprite

A graphic message element.

System Command

A function which causes some action to occur at a system software level. They are used
for such things as resetting communications, saving setpoints, restoring setpoints, etc..

System/Status CR

Actually two distinct groups of control relays. System control relays are those relays with
system addresses which can be programmed into RLD. Status control relays act as flags
only (cannot be programmed into RLD). Both System and Status CR's can be used to
cause messages to be displayed.

System Screen

One of several screens within the system screen set. These screens contain system
setup information, as well as troubleshooting data. Normally, system screens should
NOT be edited.

Transfer

The act of electronically moving screens, RLD and subsidiary information from the
computer to the controller and operator station. Also known as "downloading."

User Screen

One of several screens within the user screen set. These screens contain information
specific to the applications involved (temperature, parison, hydraulics, etc.). User
screens are usually those that are edited for very specific use by the end user.

Value

A measured or "sensed" number. A value can be used to monitor a control process (by
displaying temperature, percent, pressure, etc.) as well as time, diagnostics and other
information.

X-Bar Chart

A chart of the averages of a number of sample groups.

Appendix J
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 251 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Appendix J
1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 252 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes
Screen Printout Grid
(make a transparency of this grid and use it as an overlay on screen printouts)

15

31

47

63

79

95 111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255 271 287 303 319 335 351 367 383 399 415 431 447 463 479 495 511 527 543 559 575 591 607 623 639

255

239

223

207

191

175

159

143

127

111

95

79

63

47

31

15

271

255

239

223

207

191

175

159

143

127

111

95

79

63

47

31

15

271

287

287

95 111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255 271 287 303 319 335 351 367 383 399 415 431 447 463 479 495 511 527 543 559 575 591 607 623 639

303

79

303

63

319

47

319

31

335
15

Page 253 of 256

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

1640-IN-007-0-03

335

Appendix K

OptiGrafix Appendixes

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 254 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Page 255 of 256

OptiGrafix Appendixes

Barber-Colman Company
Industrial Instruments Division

1354 Clifford Avenue


P.O. Box 2940
Loves Park, IL U.S.A. 61132-2940
Copyright 1998 Barber-Colman Company.

1640-IN-007-0-03

Barber-Colman Company, Loves Park, IL

Phone: 1-800-232-4343
FAX: (815) 637-5341
June 1998

Page 256 of 256

You might also like